ESC/POS Command Specifications

Hybrid Printer ESC/POS Command Specifications Revision 0.00 Star Micronics Co., Ltd. Special Products Operating Division

Contents 1) GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1-1 2) COMMAND FUNCTION LIST 2-1 3) COMMAND DETAILS 3-1 3-1) Explanation of Terms 3-1 3-2) Exception processing 3-3 3-3) Command Details 3-4 3-3-1) Print Execution Commands 3-4 LF 3-4 CR 3-5 FF (Standard Mode) 3-6 FF (Page Mode) 3-7 ESC FF 3-8 ESC J n 3-9 ESC K n 3-10 ESC d n 3-11 ESC e n 3-12 3-3-2) Line Feed Amount Setting Commands 3-13 ESC 2 3-13 ESC 3 n 3-14 3-3-3) Character Related Commands 3-15 CAN 3-15 ESC t n 3-16 ESC R n 3-17 ESC M n 3-18 ESC SP n 3-19 ESC! n 3-20 ESC - N 3-22 ESC E n 3-23 ESC G n 3-24 ESC V n 3-25 ESC { n 3-26 GS! n 3-27 GS B n 3-29 GS b n 3-30 GS ( N pl ph n m <Function 48> 3-31 ESC % N 3-32 ESC & y c1 c2 [x1 d1...d (y x1 )]... [xk d1...d (y xk)] 3-33 ESC? n 3-38 3-3-4) Printing Paper Related Commands 3-39 ESC c 0 n 3-39 ESC c 1 n 3-40 ESC f t1 t2 Support difficult 3-41 GS ( G pl ph fn m <Function 48> Has Restrictions 3-42 GS ( G pl ph fn m <Function 84> 3-43 3-3-5) Panel Switches Related Commands 3-44 ESC c 5 n 3-44 3-3-6) Paper Out Sensor Related Commands 3-45 ESC c 3 n 3-45 ESC c 4 n 3-46 3-3-7) Printing Position Related Commands 3-47 HT 3-47 ESC D n1...nk NUL 3-48 ESC $ nl nh 3-49 ESC \ nl nh 3-50 ESC a n 3-51 GS L nl nh 3-52 GS W nl nh 3-54 GS T n 3-56

ESC T n 3-57 ESC W xl xh yl yh dxl dxh dyl dyh 3-58 GS $ nl nh 3-60 GS \ nl nh 3-61 3-3-8) Bit Image Graphics Related Commands 3-62 ESC * m nl nh d1...dk 3-62 FS p n m 3-65 FS q n [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]1... [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]n 3-67 GS * x y d1... d (x y 8 ) 3-70 GS / m 3-72 GS v 0 m xl xh yl yh d1...dk 3-74 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 48> 3-77 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 51> 3-79 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 64> 3-80 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 65> 3-81 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 66> 3-82 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 67> 3-83 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 69> 3-85 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 50> 3-87 (1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 112> 3-88 3-3-9) Status Related Commands 3-90 DLE EOT n 3-90 DLE EOT 0 1 3-91 GS a n 3-92 GS ( B pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] 3-94 FS ( e pl ph m n 3-95 GS r n 3-97 3-3-10) Bar Code Related Commands 3-100 GS H n 3-100 GS f n 3-101 GS h n 3-102 (1) GS k m d1...dk NUL, (2) GS k m n d1...dk 3-103 GS w n 3-109 3-3-11) Macro Related Commands 3-110 GS : 3-110 GS ^ r t m 3-111 3-3-12) Mechanical Control Related Commands 3-112 ESC < 3-112 ESC U n 3-113 (1) GS V m, (2) GS V m n 3-114 ESC F n 3-115 ESC q 3-116 3-3-13) MICR Related Commands 3-117 DLE EOT 8 1 3-117 FS ( f pl ph [n m]1... [n m]k 3-119 FS a 0 3-121 FS a 1 3-124 FS a 2 3-125 FS b 3-126 FS c 3-127 3-3-14) Other Commands 3-128 DLE ENQ n 3-128 DLE DC4 1 m t 3-129 DLE DC4 2 a b 3-130 DLE DC4 8 d1... d7 Pending 3-131 ESC = n 3-133 ESC @ 3-134 ESC L 3-135 FS L 3-136 ESC S 3-137 GS P x y 3-138 ESC p m t1 t2 3-140 GS ( A pl ph n m 3-141

GS ( D pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] 3-143 GS ( H pl ph fn n <Function 64> 3-144 GS E n 3-146 GS I n 3-147 GS g 0 m nl nh 3-148 GS g 2 m nl nh 3-148 GS ( K pl ph n m 3-149 3-3-15) Kanji Control Commands 3-150 FS & 3-150 FS. 3-152 FS C n 3-153 FS S n1 n2 3-154 FS! n 3-155 FS n 3-156 FS W n 3-157 FS 2 c1 c2 d1...dk 3-158 3-3-16) PDF417 Commands 3-161 GS ( k <Function 065> 3-161 GS ( k <Function 066> 3-162 GS ( k <Function 067> 3-163 GS ( k <Function 068> 3-164 GS ( k <Function 069> 3-165 GS ( k <Function 070> 3-167 GS ( k <Function 080> 3-168 GS ( k <Function 081> 3-169 GS ( k <Function 082> 3-171 3-3-17) User NV Memory Edit Commands 3-173 GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 <Function 0> 3-173 GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 d1...dk <Function 1> 3-174 GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 <Function 2> 3-175 GS ( C pl ph m fn b <Function 3> 3-176 GS ( C pl ph m fn b <Function 4> 3-177 GS ( C pl ph m fn b <Function 5> 3-178 GS ( C pl ph m fn b d1 d2 d3 <Function 6> 3-179 3-3-18) User Setting Mode Command 3-180 GS ( E pl ph fn 3-180 3-3-19) Printer Customizing Commands 3-181 GS ( M pl ph fn m <Function 1> 3-181 GS ( M pl ph fn m <Function 2> 3-182 GS ( M pl ph fn m <Function 3> 3-183 3-3-20) STAR Original Commands 3-184 ESC GS = nl nh da1... dak db1... dbk 3-184 ESC GS t n 3-185 ESC RS F n 3-186 ESC RS C n 3-187 ESC RS L m 3-188 ESC GS + m [t1 nl1 nh1 d11 d12... d1k]1 3-189 [t2 nl2 nh2 d21 d22... d2k]2... [tm nlm nhm dm1 dm2... dmk]m 3-189 3-3-20-1) Other STAR Original Commands 3-190 ESC GS # m N n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL 3-190 3-3-20-2) STAR Original Presenter Control Commands 3-192 ESC SYN 0 n 3-192 ESC SYN 1 n 3-192 ESC SYN 3 n 3-193 ESC SYN 4 n 3-193 3-3-20-3) STAR Original Mark Commands 3-194 ESC GS * 0 n m1 m2 m3... mk 3-195 ESC GS * 1 h v 3-195 ESC GS * 2 m c w 3-196 ESC GS * W 3-197 ESC GS * C 3-197 3-3-20-4) STAR Original Auto Logo Commands 3-198 ESC GS / W 3-200 ESC GS / C 3-200

ESC GS / 1 n 3-201 ESC GS / 2 n 3-202 ESC GS / 3 nl nh d1 d2... dk 3-203 ESC GS / 4 nl nh d1 d2... dk 3-204 ESC GS / 5 n 3-205 ESC GS / 6 n 3-206 3-3-20-5) STAR Original Buzzer Commands 3-209 ESC GS BEL m t1 t2 3-209 ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2 3-210 ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2 3-211 3-3-20-6) STAR Original Print Starting Trigger Control Commands 3-212 ESC GS g 0 m n 3-212 ESC GS g 1 m n 3-212 3-3-20-7) STAR Original Two-dimensional Bar Code QR Code Commands 3-213 ESC GS y S 0 n 3-216 ESC GS y S 1 n 3-216 ESC GS y S 2 n 3-217 ESC GS y D 1 m nl nh d1 d2... dk 3-218 ESC GS y D 2 a m1 n1l n1h d11 d12...d1k... ml nll nlh dl1 dl2...dlk 3-219 ESC GS y P 3-220 ESC GS y I 3-221 3-3-20-8) STAR Original Page Function Commands 3-222 ESC GS h 0 k m n 3-222 ESC GS h 1 k m n 3-223 4) CHARACTER CODE TABLE 4-1 5) APPENDIX 5-1 5-1) Appendix 1 Precautions 5-1 5-2) Appendix 2 Status Specifications 5-2 5-2-1) Identification of Transmission Status 5-2 5-2-2) Details of Causes of Errors by Model 5-2 5-2-3) DLE EOT Status 5-3 5-2-4) ASB Status Specifications 5-5 5-2-5) Printer Status Transmission Specification when Using Ethernet I/F 5-6 5-3) Appendix 3 Blank Page Configuration 5-8 5-4) Appendix 4 Standard Mode 5-9 5-4-1) Thermal Printing Region 5-9 5-5) Appendix 5 Page Mode 5-10 5-5-1) General Description 5-10 5-5-2) Setting Values of Commands in Standard Mode and Page Mode 5-10 5-5-3) Expanding Print Data to the Print Region <Thermal> 5-11 5-5-4) Page Mode Printing Region <Thermal > 5-14 5-5-5) Expansion of Print Data to Print Region <Slip>/<ation> 5-16 5-6) Appendix 6 Expansion Position for Slip/ation 5-18 5-6-1) 7 x 9 Fonts 5-18 5-6-2) 5 x 9 Fonts 5-18 5-6-3) Kanji Fonts 5-19 5-7) Appendix 7 Maximum Number of Characters for QR Codes in Each Version 5-20 6) SPECIAL APPENDIX COMMAND FUNCTION LIST 6-1 6-1) HSP7000 6-1 6-1-1) Setting Command List 6-1 6-1-2) Execution Command List 6-5

1) GENERAL DESCRIPTION This specifications manual describes the command specifications for the ESC/POS MODE on hybrid printers. Information contained herein applies to models with the following conditions. Hybrid printers Interface Parallel RS-232C USB Ethernet < Applicable Models:> HSP7000 1-1

2) COMMAND FUNCTION LIST : (Lines): only at the top of the line. (Setting): Only setting is valid (Default): only when there is no data in the printer buffer. See Appendix 6 Command Function List for details on commands that depend on active sheet selection (ESC c 0) and set sheet selection (ESC c 1). Print Execution Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page GS P Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode Affect LF Line feed CR Print recovery (according to memory switch settings) FF - Print and discharge paper (Standard Mode) - FF Print in page mode and recover - ESC FF Print data in page mode Ignored ESC J Print and feed paper ESC K - Print and reverse direct paper feed ESC d Print and feed paper n lines ESC e - Print and feed paper n lines in the reverse direction Line Feed Amount Setting Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page GS P Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode Affect ESC 2 Set the initial line feed amount ESC 3 Set the line feed amount Character Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page GS P Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode Affect CAN Cancel print data in page mode. Ignored ESC t Select character code table ESC R Select international characters ESC M Select character font ESC SP Set character right space amount ESC! Batch specify print mode ESC - Specify/cancels underlines ESC E Specify/cancel emphasized printing ESC G Specify/cancel double printing ESC V Specify/cancel 90 right rotation of characters (Set) ESC { Specify/cancel upside-down printing (Lines) (Set) GS! Specify character size GS B Specify/cancel white/black inverted - printing GS b Specify/cancel smoothing - GS ( N Select 2-color printing - ESC % Specify/cancel download character set ESC & Define download characters ESC? Delete download characters Printing Paper Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC c 0 Select printing sheet Ignored ESC c 1 Select command setting sheet Ignored ESC f - Set single docket waiting time GS ( G fn48 Select printer Ignored GS ( G fn84 - Feed paper to slip paper printing starting position GS P Affect 2-1

Panel Switch Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC c 5 ate/invalidate panel switches Page GS P Affect Paper Out Sensor Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard ESC c 3 ESC c 4 Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode Selects paper out sensor to validate at paper out signal output Select paper out sensor to enable at printing stop Page GS P Affect Printing Position Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page GS P Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode Affect HT Horizontal tab ESC D Set horizontal tab position ESC $ Specify absolute position ESC \ Specify relative position ESC a Position alignment (Lines) (Set) GS L Set left margin (Lines) (Set) GS W Set print region region (Lines) (Set) GS T Move to top of line Ignored ESC T Select character print direction in page mode. (Set) ESC W Set print region in page mode (Set) GS $ Specify character vertical direction absolute position in page mode Ignored GS \ Specify character vertical direction relative position in page mode Ignored Bit Image Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC * Specify bit image mode FS p Print NV bit image (Default) FS q Define NV bit image (Lines) Ignored GS * Define the download bit image GS / Print the download bit image (Default) GS v 0 Print the raster bit image (Default) GS ( L fn=48 Send NV graphics memory capacity GS ( L fn=51 Send remaining NV graphics memory capacity GS ( L fn=64 Send defined NC graphics key code list GS ( L fn=65 Batch delete all NV graphics data (Lines) Ignored GS ( L fn=66 Delete specified NV graphics data (Lines) Ignored GS ( L fn=67 Define NV graphics data (Raster format) (Lines) Ignored GS ( L fn=69 Print specified NV graphics data (Lines) GS ( L fn=50 Print graphics data stored in the buffer - Ignored GS ( L fn=112 Store graphics data in print buffer (Raster format) - (Lines) Status Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode DLE EOT Real-time status transmission DLE EOT 0 1 Real-time status transmission GS a /invalid transmission of automatic status GS ( B Bit-customize ASB status FS ( e ate/invalidate expanded ASB transmission GS r Transmission of status 2-2 Page GS P Affect GS P Affect

Bar Code Related Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode GS H Select HRI character print position - GS f Select HRI character font - GS h Set bar code height - GS k Print bar code - (Default) GS w Set bar code horizontal size - GS P Affect Macro Related Commands Commands Command Name Standard Page Class Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode GS : Start/end macro definition GS ^ Execute macro GS P Affect Mechanical Control Related Commands Commands Command Name Standard Page GS P Class Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode Affect ESC < - Return Home ESC U - Specify/cancel single-direction printing GS V Cut paper - (Lines) ESC F - Specify/cancel reverse discharge of cut paper ESC q - Released Ignored MICR Related Commands Commands Command Name MICR Others Class Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode DLE EOT 8 1 - Real-time MICR status transmission FS ( f - Select MICR reading operation FS a 0 - Decode check paper FS a 1 - Check paper feed to printing start position FS a 2 - Check paper discharge FS b - Send request of reading results of check paper FS c - MICR mechanism cleaning GS P Affect Other Commnds Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode DLE ENQ Real-time request to printer DLE DC4 1 Real-time output of specified pulse DLE DC4 2 Execute power off process Ignored Ignored DLE DC4 8 Buffer clear ESC = Select peripheral device ESC @ Initialize printer ESC L Select page mode (Lines) Ignored FS L - Select double-density page mode (Lines) Ignored ESC S Select standard mode Ignored GS P Set basic calculated pitch ESC p Specify pulse GS ( A Run a test print GS ( D ate/invalidate real-time commands Ignored Ignored GS ( H ate/invalidate paper status transmission GS E Set print speed - (Lines) Ignored GS I Transmission of printer ID GS g 0 Initialize maintenance counter Ignored Ignored GS g 2 Send maintenance counter Ignored Ignored GS ( K Set print density - GS P Affect 2-3

Kanji Control Commands (Only for Japanese, Chinese and Taiwanese Kanji Supporting Specifications) Commands Name Command Class Standard Page GS P Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode Affect FS & Specify Kanji character mode FS. Cancel Kanji character mode FS C Select Kanji character font FS S Set Kanji character space amount FS! Batch specify Kanji character print mode FS - Specify/cancel Kanji character underline FS W Specify/cancel double-tall, double wide Kanji characters FS 2 Define external characters PDF417 Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode GS ( k fn65 Set number of positions - GS ( k fn66 Set number of levels - GS ( k fn67 Set module width - GS ( k fn68 Set level height - GS ( k fn69 Set error correction level - GS ( k fn70 Set options - GS ( k fn80 Set bar code data - (Store data in symbol saving region) GS ( k fn81 Print bar code (print symbol data of - symbol saving region) GS ( k fn82 Send size information (Send size information of symbol data in symbol saving region) User NV Memory Edit Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode GS ( C fn0 Delete specified record Ignored Ignored GS ( C fn1 Store data in specified record Ignored Ignored GS ( C fn2 Send stored data of specified record Ignored Ignored GS ( C fn3 Transmission of use capacity Ignored Ignored GS ( C fn4 Transmission of remaining capacity Ignored Ignored GS ( C fn5 Send key code list of stored record Ignored Ignored GS ( C fn6 Batch delete all regions Ignored Ignored GS P Affect GS P Affect User Setting Mode Command Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode GS ( E User setting mode Ignored Ignored GS P Affect Printer Customized Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode GS ( M fn1 Save set value of the work region to saving region (Flash) Ignored Ignored GS ( M fn2 Load to work region of specified setting value Ignored Ignored GS ( M fn3 Select setting value of work region in initializing process Ignored Ignored GS P Affect 2-4

STAR Original Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS = Write blank code page data - ESC GS t Select character code table ESC RS F Select font - ESC RS C Select print mode - Ignored ESC RS L Logo batch control Ignored ESC GS + Macro registration Page GS P Affect Other STAR Original Command Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS # m Memory Switch Settings Page GS P Affect STAR Original Presenter Control Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC SYN 0 Execute presenter paper recovery - Ignored Ignored ESC SYN 1 Set presenter paper recovery time - Ignored Ignored ESC SYN 3 Get presenter counter - Ignored Ignored ESC SYN 4 Initialize presenter counter - Ignored Ignored STAR Original Mark Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS * 0 Print mark - (Default) Ignored ESC GS * 1 Set mark height and line feed amount - (Set) ESC GS * 2 Set mark color, horizontal width - (Set) ESC GS * W Register mark format to non-volatile memory - ESC GS * C Initialize mark format from non-volatile - memory Star Original Auto Logo Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS / W Register Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory - ESC GS / C Initialize Auto Logo setting from nonvolatile memory - ESC GS / 1 Set ON/OFF for Auto Logo function - (Set) ESC GS / 2 Set command characters - (Set) ESC GS / 3 Set user macro 1 - (Set) ESC GS / 4 Set user macro 2 - (Set) ESC GS / 5 Set command character switching - method (Set) ESC GS / 6 Set partial cut just prior to logo printing - (Set) STAR Original Buzzer Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS BEL Ring buzzer ESC GS EM Set external buzzer drive pulse condition DC1 ESC GS EM Execute external buzzer drive DC2 STAR Original Print Starting Trigger Control Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Page Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS g 0 Print starting trigger - Ignored ESC GS g 1 Set print start timer - (Set) Page Page GS P Affect GS P Affect GS P Affect GS P Affect GS P Affect 2-5

STAR Original QR Code Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS y S 0 Set QR code model - ESC GS y S 1 Set QR code error correction level - ESC GS y S 2 Set QR code cell size - ESC GS y D 1 Set QR code data (auto) - ESC GS y D 2 Set QR code data (manual) - ESC GS y P Print QR code - ESC GS y I Request QR code expansion information STAR Original Page Function Commands Commands Name Command Class Standard Thermal Slip, ation Executed Set Mode Mode ESC GS h 0 180 inversion - (Set) ESC GS h 1 Water Mark - (Set) Page Page GS P Affect GS P Affect 2-6

3) COMMAND DETAILS 3-1) Explanation of Terms Reception Buffer The buffer for storing data (reception data) received from the host, as it is called the reception buffer. Reception data is temporarily stored in the reception b ffer, then processed sequentially. Print Buffer The buffer for storing image data for printing is called the print buffer. Print Buffer Full The state in which the buffer has no more space available is called print buffer full. When the print buffer is full in standard mode, data in the print buffer is printed and a line feed is performed when new print data is processed.this is the same as a Line Feed. When the print buffer is full in the page mode, the printer move the print position to the head of the next line then starts with the new print data. Top of line The top of line is a state that satisfies the following conditions. A. There is currently no print data in the print buffer. B. There is no skip portion by HT. C. Print position not specified by ESC $ or ESC \. Printable region This is the maximum printable area with the printer s specifications. Printing Region This is the printing area specified by a command.(print region printable region) Ignored All codes, including parameters, are read and discarded. Therefore, there are no operations. Invalid Codes of the command portion are read and discarded. Therefore, the parameter portion is processed as ordinary data. Inch A unit of length. 1 inch = 25.4 mm MSB This is an abbreviation of Most Significant Bit. LSB This is an abbreviation of Least Significant Bit. SBCS This is an abbreviation of Single Byte Character Set.These are characters in languages that can be displayed using the information in one byte. In this specifications manual, it refers to the standard specifications (destination: single byte countries). DBCS This is an abbreviation of Double Byte Character Set.These are characters in languages that can be displayed using the information in two bytes. In this specifications manual, it refers to the Kanji character specifications such as Japan, China and Taiwan (destination: 2- byte countries). 3-1

<Thermal> ANK character base line 1. Upright characters FONT-A/FONT-B (Standard mode/page mode) 24 Dots Ay 20 Dots 2. Rotated characters FONT-A (Standard mode) A y 10 Dots (11 dots when using enhanced printing) < Base Line 3. Rotated characters FONT-B (Standard mode) A y 7 Dots (8 dots when using enhanced printing) <---- Base Line Kanji Page Line 1. Upright characters (Standard mode/page mode) 24 Dots 20 Dots Base Line 2. Rotated characters (Standard mode) 24Dots Base Line 3-2

3-2) Exception processing 1) Undefined codes Codes from <00>H to <1F>H are targeted.when codes not defined as commands in this region are received, they are discarded. [Ex.:] If processing the data string of <30>H<31>H<03>H<32>H<0A>H<33>H, the printer will discard <03>H as an undefined code. 2) Undefined commands When data continuing the codes of ESC, FS, GS, DLE are codes not defined as commands, ESC, FS,GS and subsequent codes are discarded. [Ex.:] If processing the data string of <30>H<1B>H<22>H<31>H<32>H, the printer will read and discard <1B>H<22>H as an undefined command. 3) Settings outside of the defined area Processing values outside of the defined area in commands accompanying arguments, those commands are ignored and the preset values are unchanged. The processing of commands is terminated at the point values outside of the defined region are processed in arguments having a plurality of commands. [Ex.:] If processing the data string of <1B>H<52>H<15>H, the printer will discard the data string of <1B>H<52>H<15>H because although <1B>H<52>H is defined as a commands (ESC R), the argument <15>H is outside of the definition.therefore, the international character set that is already set experiences no change. 4) Real-time command Real-time command Real-time commands are stored in the reception buffer. 3-3

3-3) Command Details 3-3-1) Print Execution Commands LF [Name] Line feed [Code] ASCII LF Hexadecimal 0A Decimal 10 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Prints data in the print buffer and performs a line feed based on the set line feed amount. [Details] After execution, the top of the line is positioned at the next print starting position. Line feed amount is set by the line feed amount setting command (ESC 2/ESC 3). Processing of this command in Page Mode only moves the print position, and the printer does not actually operate. <Thermal> [STAR] When the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, a line feed operation is executed for the height of the print data. <Slip>, <ation> [STAR] When the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, the data is printed, and a line feed operation is executed regardless of the print data height, but it is possible that it will overlap the next print line. [Reference] ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC c 0, GS (r, Appendix 1 3-4

CR [Name] Carriage return [Code] ASCII CR Hexadecimal 0D Decimal 13 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : Memory switch setting Slip : Memory switch setting ation : Memory switch setting [Function] Specifies the function according to the memory switch value. See each printer s product specifications manual for details on the memory switch settings. <Thermal> Memory SW Condition (1) Condition (2) Function Ignored Same as the LF code. <Slip>, <ation> Memory SW Function Condition (1) Ignored Condition (2) Same as the LF code. Condition (3) Executes only printing, with no paper feed. [Reference] ESC c 0, GS (S, LF, Appendix 1 3-5

FF (Standard Mode) [Name] Print and discharge paper (Standard Mode) [Code] ASCII FF Hexadecimal 0C Decimal 12 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> 1 byte ignored <Slip>, <ation> When in Standard Mode, the printer batch prints data in the print buffer and discharges the paper. (Slip paper or validation paper) when slip, and validation are selected. [Details] [STAR] This command is valid only when slip paper or validation paper is selected as the active sheet using ESC c 0. After discharging, thermal is selected for the printer as the active sheet. Also, the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. This command is executed and the SLIP LED flashes when the printer waits for the paper to be inserted. This status is checked using the customized standard ASB. If the paper is at a position where printing is not possible, the printer waits for paper to be inserted after discharging it in the forward direction regardless of the ESC F setting. From the point where paper out is detected by the BOF sensor, paper is fed more than approximately 75 mm (425/144 inches) and paper is discharged in the forward direction regardless of the ESC F setting. From the point where paper out is detected by the COF sensor, paper is fed more than approximately 5mm and paper is discharged in the forward direction regardless of the ESC F setting. Note There is a region where paper feeds to the reverse direction are not possible with slips. When the bottom edge of the slip paper is in this region, paper is discharged in the forward direction regardless of the ESC F setting. [Reference] GS ( S, ESC c 0, ESC C, ESC F, GS r 3-6

FF (Page Mode) [Name] Print in page mode and recover [Code] ASCII FF Hexadecimal 0C Decimal 12 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] When page mode and double-density page mode are selected, data in the print buffer is printed and the printer switches to standard mode. [Details] Can be selected in page mode using ESC L. After printing, data is cleared. The print region set by the print region setting (ESC W) in page mode is initialized. The print direction set by the print direction setting (ESC T) in page mode is maintained. After execution, the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. <Thermal> only when page mode is selected. <Slip>, <ation> When executing this command, the settings for enhanced printing (ESC!, ESC E) and double printing (ESC G) are valid for all print data on the page. [Reference] ESC c 0, GS ( S, ESC FF, ESC L, ESC S, GS r 3-7

ESC FF [Name] Print data in page mode [Code] ASCII ESC FF Hexadecimal 1B 0C Decimal 27 12 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Batch prints all data expanded to the print region when in the page mode or double-density page mode. [Details] This command is valid only when page mode is selected. Can be selected in page mode using ESC L, FS L. After printing, the following information is maintained. a. Expanded data b. Select character print direction in page mode (ESC T). c. Set print region in page mode (ESC W) d. Character expansion position After executing FF, ESC S, ESC @, returns to standard mode. Note that ESC @ initializes all settings. <Slip>, <ation> When executing this command, the settings for enhanced printing (ESC!, ESC E) and double printing (ESC G) are valid for all print data on the page. [Reference] ESC c 0, GS ( S, ESC L, FS L, FF, ESC S, ESC @, GS r 3-8

ESC J n [Name] Print and feed paper [Code] ASCII ESC J n Hexadecimal 1B 4A n Decimal 27 74 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Prints data in the print buffer and performs one line feed of [n x basic calculated pitch]. [Details] Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. In standard mode, uses the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. In page mode, basic calculated pitch used by the beginning point is different. a. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper left or lower right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. Use the vertical direction basic calculated pitch (y). b. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper right or lower left by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. Use the horizontal direction basic calculated pitch (x). If the [n x basic calculated pitch] exceeds approximately 1016 mm (40 inches), executes a paper feed of approximately 1016 mm. After execution, the top of the line is positioned at the next print starting position. After execution, the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. The line feed amount set by the following commands is not affected. a. Setting of the initial line feed amount (ESC 2) b. Setting of the line feed amount (ESC 3) If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. [STAR] <Thermal> In standard mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, a line feed operation is executed for the height of the print data. <Slip>, <ation> When the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, the data is printed, and a line feed operation is executed regardless of the print data height, but it is possible that it will overlap the next print line. [Reference] ESC c 0, GS ( S, GS P, ESC T, ESC K, GS r 3-9

ESC K n [Name] Print and reverse direct paper feed [Code] ASCII ESC K n Hexadecimal 1B 4B n Decimal 27 75 n [Defined Area] Thermal : - Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> 3 bytes ignored <Slip>, <ation> Prints data in the print buffer and performs one line feed of [n x basic calculated pitch] in the reverse direction. [Details] In standard mode, uses the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. In page mode, basic calculated pitch used by the beginning point is different. a. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper left or lower right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. Use the vertical direction basic calculated pitch (y). b. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper right or lower left by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. Use the horizontal direction basic calculated pitch (x). If the [n x basic calculated pitch] exceeds approximately 1016 mm (40 inches), executes a reverse paper feed of approximately 1016 mm. After execution, the top of the line is positioned at the next print starting position. After execution, the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. The line feed amount set by the following commands is not affected. a. Set the initial line feed amount (ESC 2) b. Setting of the line feed amount (ESC 3) [Reference] ESC c 0, GS ( S, GS P, ESC T, ESC J, GS r 3-10

ESC d n [Name] Print and feed paper n lines [Code] ASCII ESC d n Hexadecimal 1B 64 n Decimal 27 100 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Prints data in the print buffer and performs one line feed of n lines. [Details] The paper feed amount is determined by the line feed amount set by the following commands. a. Set the initial line feed amount (ESC 2) b. Setting of the line feed amount (ESC 3) If the [n x line feed amount] exceeds approximately 1016 mm (40 inches), executes a paper feed of approximately 1016 mm (40 inches). After execution, the top of the line is positioned at the next print starting position. After execution, the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. When executing this command in page mode, the printer moves only the printing position and does not execute actual printing. The set line feed amount is not affected. [STAR] <Thermal> In standard mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, a line feed operation is executed for the height of the print data. In page mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. A line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. <Slip>, <ation> In standard mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, print data is printed, and a line feed operation is executed for the height. In such cases, there is the possibility that the print will overlap the next line of print. In page mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, print data is expanded, and a line feed operation is executed for the height. [Reference] ESC c 0, GS ( S, GS P, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC e, GS r 3-11

ESC e n [Name] Print and feed paper n lines in the reverse direction [Code] ASCII ESC e n Hexadecimal 1B 65 n Decimal 27 101 n [Defined Area] Thermal : - Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> 3 bytes ignored <Slip>, <ation> Prints data in the print buffer and performs reverse, one line feed of n lines. [Details] The paper feed amount is determined by the line feed amount set by the following commands. a. Set the initial line feed amount (ESC 2) b. Setting of the line feed amount (ESC 3) If the [n x line feed amount] exceeds approximately 1016 mm (40 inches), executes a reverse paper feed of approximately 1016 mm (40 inches). After execution, the top of the line is positioned at the next print starting position. After execution, the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. When executing this command in page mode, the printer moves only the printing position and does not execute actual printing. The set line feed amount is not affected. If the bottom edge of the paper is within the prescribed range, and there is print data in the buffer, a paper feed will not be executed. [Reference] ESC c 0, GS ( S, GS P, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC e, GS r 3-12

3-3-2) Line Feed Amount Setting Commands ESC 2 [Name] Set the initial line feed amount [Code] ASCII ESC 2 Hexadecimal 1B 32 Decimal 27 50 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sets line feed amount for one line of a set sheet selected by ESC c 1 to the initial value. [Details] This command defines the line feed amount of a set sheet selected by ESC c 1. Thermal, Slip, ation can each be set independently. Line feed amounts can be set independently for both standard mode and page mode. When in standard mode, set the line feed amount for standard mode to the initial value when this command is executed. When in page mode, set the line feed amount for page mode to the initial value when this command is executed. This setting is valid until ESC 3 or ESC @ are executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. [STAR] <Thermal> In standard mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, a line feed operation is executed for the height of the print data. EPSON has models equipped with 180 and 203 DPI print heads. STAR print heads are 203 DPI, so if a EPSON 180 DPI print head model is targeted, it is necessary to correct the line feed amount that is different because of the difference in print density of such print heads. In such cases, the initial value of the line feed amount on STAR printers is corrected to the following by the basic calculated pitch correction using the DIPSW. This does not apply to printers with a 203 DPI print head and do not require correction. DIPSW Basic Calculated Pitch Correction Intial Value of Line Feed Amount 203 DPI (Default) Approx. 4.23 mm (1/6 inch) 180DPI Approx. 3.75mm <Slip>, <ation> Initial value: 1/6 inch In standard mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, that data is printed and the set line feed amount is executed. In such cases, there is the possibility that printing will overlap the printing of the next line. [Reference] ESC c 1, ESC 3, ESC @ 3-13

ESC 3 n [Name] Set the line feed amount [Code] ASCII ESC 3 n Hexadecimal 1B 33 n Decimal 27 51 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : See ESC 2 Slip : See ESC 2 ation : See ESC 2 [Function] Sets line feed amount for one line of a set sheet selected by ESC c 1 to the [n x basic calculated pitch]. [Details] Maximum settable line feed amount is approx. 1016 mm (40 inches). Settings that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to the maximum value. In standard mode, uses the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. In page mode, basic calculated pitch used by the beginning point is different. a. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper left or lower right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. Use the vertical direction basic calculated pitch (y). b. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper right or lower left by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. Use the horizontal direction basic calculated pitch (x). This command defines the line feed amount of a set sheet selected by ESC c 1. Thermal, Slip, ation can each be set independently. Line feed amounts can be set independently for both standard mode and page mode. When in standard mode, set the line feed amount for standard mode when this command is executed. When in page mode, set the line feed amount for page mode when this command is executed. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. The set line feed amount will not change even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after being set. This setting is valid until ESC 2 or ESC @ are executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. [STAR] <Thermal> In standard mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, a line feed operation is executed for the height of the print data. <Slip>, <ation> In standard mode, when the line feed amount setting is smaller than the height of the print data: a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount. b. If there is print data, that data is printed and the set line feed amount is executed. In such cases, there is the possibility that printing will overlap the printing of the next line. [Reference] ESC c 1, ESC 2, GS P, ESC T, ESC @ 3-14

3-3-3) Character Related Commands CAN [Name] Cancel print data in page mode. [Code] ASCII CAN Hexadecimal 18 Decimal 24 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] In page mode, deletes all data of the print region currently set. [Details] only when page mode is selected. Can be selected in page mode using ESC L, FS L. In standard mode, 1 byte ignored. Portion included in the currently set print region is deleted even if data of the print region set previously. [Reference] ESC L, FS L, ESC W 3-15

ESC t n [Name] Select character code table [Code] ASCII ESC t n Hexadecimal 1B 74 n Decimal 27 116 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 5, 16 n 19, n = 254, 255 Slip : 0 n 5, 16 n 19, n = 254, 255 ation : 0 n 5, 16 n 19, n = 254, 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Selects page n of the character code table. n Character Types 0 PC437 (USA: Standard Europe) 1 Katakana 2 PC850 (Multilingual) 3 PC860 (Portuguese) 4 PC863 (Canadian-French) 5 PC865 (Nordic) 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 16 WPC1252 17 PC866 (Cyrillic #2) 18 PC852(Latin2) 19 PC858 254 Blank page 255 Blank page [Details] This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. [Reference] ESC GS t, ESC @ 3-16

ESC R n [Name] Select international characters [Code] ASCII ESC R n Hexadecimal 1B 52 n Decimal 27 82 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 13 Slip : 0 n 13 ation : 0 n 13 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Selects the character set of the countries in the table below. n Country 0 America 1 France 2 Germany 3 UK 4 Denmark I 5 Sweden 6 Italy 7 Spain I 8 Japan 9 Norway 10 Denmark II 11 Spain II 12 Latin America 13 Korea [Details] [STAR] This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. Note that if the code page 3041 (Maltese) is selected for the code page by ESC GS t, international characters are disabled and the specified characters of code page 3041 are printed. [Reference] Character code table, ESC GS t, ESC @ 3-17

ESC M n [Name] Select character font [Code] ASCII ESC M n Hexadecimal 1B 4D n Decimal 27 77 n [Defined Area] Thermal : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 Slip : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 ation : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] [Details] Selects character font. n Function (Thermal) Function (Slip, ation) 0, 48 Selects font-a (12 x 24) Selects font-a (5 x 9) 1, 49 Selects font-b (9 x 17) Selects font-b (7 x 9) This setting is valid until ESC!, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. <Thermal> HRI characters are not affected. [STAR] The following shows the font configuration for STAR printers. Character Fonts Horizontal x Vertical Dots Font A 12 x 24 Dots Font B 9 x 24 Dots <Slip>, <ation> No base line. In page mode, it is not possible to set font B (7 x 9). [Reference] ESC!, ESC @ 3-18

ESC SP n [Name] Set character right space amount [Code] ASCII ESC SP n Hexadecimal 1B 20 n Decimal 27 32 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Sets right space of characters to [n x basic calculated pitch]. [Details] The setting of the right space amount using this command is valid only for ANK and download characters. Kanji characters are not affected. When the magnification rate in the character horizontal direction is more than 2, the right space amount increases according to the magnification rate. In standard mode, uses the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. In page mode, basic calculated pitch used by the beginning point is different. a. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper left or lower right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. b. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper right or lower left by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. Right space amount can be set independently for both standard mode and page mode. When in standard mode, set the right space amount for standard mode when this command is executed. When in page mode, set the right space amount for page mode when this command is executed. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. The set right space amount will not change even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after being set. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is used to change spaces between characters. Settings for standard mode/page mode are shared by each station. n + character width printable character region If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. <Thermal> Maximum settable right space amount is approx. 35.983mm (255/180 inches). Settings that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to the maximum value. HRI characters are not affected. <Slip>, <ation> Settings are performed in half-dot units. The maximum value of the right space is approximately 40.481 mm (255/160 inches) when standard mode or page mode is selected (when the starting point is set to upper left or lower right). When in page mode, it is 44.979 mm (255/144 inches) (when the starting point is set to lower left or upper right). Settings that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to the maximum value. [Reference] GS P, ESC T, ESC @ 3-19

ESC! n [Name] Batch specify print mode [Code] ASCII ESC! n Hexadecimal 1B 21 n Decimal 27 33 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] [Details] [STAR] Selects character font and style. Bit Function 0 1 7 Underline Invalid 6 Undefined - - 5 Double-wide expanded Invalid 4 Double-tall expanded Invalid 3 Emphasized printing Invalid 2 Undefined - - 1 Undefined - - 0 Character Fonts Font-A Font-B Character font (Bit 0), character size (Bits 4, 5) and underline mode (Bit 7) are valid only for ANK characters and download characters. Enhanced mode (Bit 3) setting is valid for ANK characters, download characters, Kanji, and Kanji download characters. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Also, valid until the following commands are executed. Bit 0 (Character font): ESC M Bit 3 (Enhanced mode): ESC E Bits 4, 5 (Character size) GS! Bit 7 (Underline mode): ESC - Character size is double-high and double-wide when vertical expansion (Bit 4 = 1) and horizontal expansion (Bit 5 = 1) are both specified. In standard mode, when double-high is specified (expanded in the print direction), it is expanded in the paper feed direction. When double-wide is specified, it is expanded in the perpendicular direction with regard to the paper feed direction. However, when 90º rotation is valid, the relationship of double-high/double-wide is reversed. In page mode, double-high/double-wide are handled as they are. Regardless of the characters, the thickness of the underline is that specified by the underline specification command (ESC -). The color of the underline is the same color as the characters. The print color is specified by GS ( N. Underlines are added to the entire width of the characters including the right space amount (ESC SP) of the character. However, underlines are not added to portions skipped by 90º rotated characters (ESC V), white/black inverted characters (GS B), horizontal tab (HT), absolute position movement (ESC $), and relative position movement (ESC \). This setting is valid for all stations and modes. The following shows the font configuration for STAR printers. Character Fonts Thermal (Horizontal x Vertical) Slip, ation (Horizontal x Vertical) Font-A 12 x 24 Dots 5 x 9 Dots Font-B 9 x 24 Dots 7 x 9 Dots Kanji Fonts 24 x 24 Dots 16 x 16 Dots <Thermal> If characters with different vertical direction magnifications are used in the same line, they are aligned to the character base line. HRI characters are not affected. 3-20

<Slip>, <ation> No base line. If characters with different vertical direction magnifications are used in the same line, they are aligned to the bottom of the characters. In page mode, it is not possible to set font B (7 x 9). When double-density page mode is selected, only the setting for emphasized printing (Bit 3) is valid using this command. [Reference] ESC -, ESC E, ESC M, ESC P, GS!, ESC @, ESC SP, ESC V, GS B, HT, ESC $, ESC \ 3-21

ESC - N [Name] Select/cancel underling mode [Code] ASCII ESC - n Hexadecimal 1B 2D n Decimal 27 45 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 Slip : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 ation : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels underlines. n Function (Thermal) Function (Slip, ation) 0, 48 Cancels underline Cancels underline 1, 49 1-dot width underlines setting and underline specification Specifies underline 2, 50 2-dot width underlines setting and underline specification Specifies underline [Details] This setting is valid only for ANK characters and download characters. Kanji characters are not affected. Underlines are not added to 90º right rotated characters (ESC V) and white/black inverted characters (GS B). The color of the underline is the same color as the characters. The print color is specified by GS (N. Underlines are added to the entire width of the characters including the right space amount (ESC SP) of the character. However, underlines are not added to portions skipped by horizontal tab (HT), absolute position movement (ESC $), and relative position movement (ESC \). Regardless of the character size, underline width is constant with the specified thickness. This setting is valid until ESC!, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. <Thermal> When underlining is canceled using n = 0 or 48, underlines are not added to subsequent data, but the underline width maintains the previous setting. The default underline width is 1-dot. Underlines are added to the following positions for both Font-A and Font B. 1-dot-width underline: 24 th dot 2-dot-width underline: 23 rd + 24 th dots HRI characters are not affected. <Slip>, <ation> Underlines are applied to the 9 th dot of the character. If underlines have been specified using n = 2 or 50, after switching to Thermal, 2-dot-width underlines are valid. [Reference] ESC! HT, ESC $, ESC \, ESC @ 3-22

ESC E n [Name] Specify/cancel emphasized printing [Code] ASCII ESC E n Hexadecimal 1B 45 n Decimal 27 69 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels emphasized printing. When n = <*******0>B: Cancels emphasized printing. When n = <*******1>B: Specifies emphasized printing. [Details] This setting is valid for ANK characters, download characters, Kanji and Kanji downloads. This setting is valid until ESC!, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Exactly the same print results for emphasized and double printing are attained with this printer. Command settings of emphasized (ESC E) and double printing (ESC G) affect each other. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. <Thermal> HRI characters are not affected. <Slip>, <ation> In page mode, the setting values immediately prior to printing with this command are reflected in the print results of the entire page. When double-density page mode is selected, only settings for this command are valid. [Reference] ESC!, ESC G 3-23

ESC G n [Name] Specify/cancel double printing [Code] ASCII ESC G n Hexadecimal 1B 47 n Decimal 27 71 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels double printing. When n = <*******0>B: Cancels double printing. When n = <*******1>B: Specifies double printing. [Details] This setting is valid for ANK characters, download characters, Kanji and Kanji downloads. This setting is valid until ESC!, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Exactly the same print results for emphasized and double printing are attained with this printer. Command settings of emphasized (ESC E) and double printing (ESC G) affect each other. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. <Thermal> HRI characters are not affected. <Slip>, <ation> In page mode, the setting values immediately prior to printing with this command are reflected in the print results of the entire page. When double-density page mode is selected, only settings for this command are valid. [Reference] ESC!, ESC E 3-24

ESC V n [Name] Specify/cancel 90 right rotation of characters [Code] ASCII ESC V n Hexadecimal 1B 56 n Decimal 27 86 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 Slip : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 ation : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels 90º right rotation of characters. n Function (Thermal) Function (Slip, ation) 0, 48 Cancels 90º right rotation Cancels 90º right rotation 1, 49 Specifies 90º right rotation Specifies 90º right rotation (1-dot horizontal direction space) 2, 50 Specifies 90º right rotation Specifies 90º right rotation (1.5-dot horizontal direction space) [Details] [STAR] This setting is valid for ANK characters, Kanji and Kanji downloads. 90º right rotation does not affect page mode. When this command is sent when page mode is selected, the setting is valid after switching to standard mode. Even when underline is specified (ESC!, ESC -, FS -), an underline is not added to 90º right-rotated characters. When 90º right rotation is specified, the relationship of horizontal and vertical expansion on the character direction is reversed to when 90º right rotation is canceled. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations. When printing 90º right-rotated characters, the characters are rotated as shown in the drawing below. Vertical 1 Horizontal 2 Mags Right Space Vertical 1 Horizontal 1 Mag M 90 Degree Clockwise Rotation Vertical 1 Horizontal 2 Mags Right Space Vertical 1 Horizontal 1 Mag M <Thermal> If a 90º right rotation of a 1.5-dot horizontal direction space has been specified using n = 2 or 50, after switching to Thermal, 90º right rotation of a 1.5-dot horizontal direction space is valid. <Slip>, <ation> When Font-B (7 x 9) is selected, this is rotated with Font-A (5 x 9) and printed. When rotation is specified, only the setting is valid for the Font-B (7 x 9) selection. ( after rotation is canceled.) When download characters are valid, and rotation is specified, they become temporarily invalid, and are valid again after rotating is canceled. When rotation is cancelled, it returns to the font prior to specifying rotation. [Reference] ESC!, ESC -, FS -, ESC @ 3-25

ESC { n [Name] Specify/cancel upside-down printing [Code] ASCII ESC { n Hexadecimal 1B 7B n Decimal 27 123 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels upside-down printing. When n = <*******0>B: Cancels upside-down printing. When n = <*******1>B: Specifies upside-down printing. [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when input at the top of the line. Upside-down printing mode is valid for all data except in standard mode and the following modes. Graphics printing: GS ( L <Function 112> Raster bit image: GS v 0 This command does not affect page mode. When page mode is selected, only settings for this command are valid. Upside-down printing prints by rotating that line of data 180 degrees. With upside-down printing, the direction of characters to be printed is not reverse to the order of the line to be printed. When upside-down printing is canceled ABCDEF 012345 When upside-down printing is specified ABCDEF 012345 Paper Feed Cirection This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations. [Reference] GS ( L, GS v 0, ESC @ 3-26

GS! n [Name] Specify character size [Code] ASCII GS! n Hexadecimal 1D 21 n Decimal 29 33 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 However, 1 vertical direction magnification 8, 1 horizontal direction magnification 8 Slip : 0 n 255 However, 1 vertical direction magnification 2, 1 horizontal direction magnification 2 ation : 0 n 255 However, 1 vertical direction magnification 2, 1 horizontal direction magnification 2 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies character size (vertical direction magnification/horizontal direction magnification) Bit Function 0 1 7 Specifies horizontal direction magnification (See table below) 6 5 4 3 Specifies vertical direction magnification (See table below) 2 1 0 Horizontal direction magnification Vertical direction magnification Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Hor. Dir. Mag. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Hor. Dir. Mag. 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 6 0 1 0 1 6 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 1 8 0 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 Undefined 1 1 1 1 Undefined [Details] This setting is valid for ANK characters, download characters, Kanji and Kanji downloads. When double-wide is specified, the character is expanded to the right using the left edge as its axis. With standard mode, the vertical direction indicates the paper feed direction. Horizontal direction indicates a perpendicular direction with regard to the paper feed direction. Therefore, the relationship of horizontal and vertical with regard to the characters is reversed when 90º right-rotation characters is specified. If either one of the vertical or horizontal direction magnifications is out of the defined region, this command is ignored. With page mode, the vertical direction indicates the vertical direction to the characters. Horizontal direction indicates a horizontal direction with regard to the characters. This setting for ANK characters is valid until ESC!, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting for Kanji characters is valid until FS!, FS W, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. 3-27

<Thermal> When vertical magnification is specified, the character is expanded upward and downward using the character base line as its axis. If characters with different vertical direction magnifications are used in the same line, they are aligned to the character base line. HRI characters are not affected. <Slip>, <ation> When vertical magnification is specified, the character is expanded upward using the character bottom edge as its axis. When slip, or validation is selected, this is handled as double-expansion even if more than triple-expansion is set. Setting more than triple is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] ESC!, FS!, FS W, ESC @ 3-28

GS B n [Name] Specify/cancel white/black inverted printing [Code] ASCII GS B n Hexadecimal 1D 42 n Decimal 29 66 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Specifies or cancels white/black inverted printing. When n = <*******0>B: Cancels white/black inverted printing. When n = <*******1>B: Specifies white/black inverted printing. [Details] This setting is valid for ANK characters, download characters, Kanji and Kanji downloads. Character spaces set by the character right space amount setting (ESC SP) and Kanji right/left space amount setting (FS S) are also targeted for white/black inverted printing. The following are not targeted for white/black inverted printing. a. ESC *: Bit image b. GS /: Download bit image c. HT: Skipped portions using horizontal tabs d. ESC $: Skipped portions using absolute position specification e. ESC \: Skipped portions using relative position specification Specification of white/black inverted printing has priority over underlines. Therefore, when underlines are specified, they are not applied to white/black inverted characters. However, the underline settings do not change. Line spaces are not affected. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. <Thermal> Bar codes and HRI characters are not affected. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] ESC!, FS!, FS W, ESC @ 3-29

GS b n [Name] Specify/cancel smoothing [Code] ASCII GS b n Hexadecimal 1D 62 n Decimal 29 98 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] 3 bytes ignored 3-30

GS ( N pl ph n m <Function 48> [Name] Print color specification [Code] ASCII GS ( N pl ph 0 m Hexadecimal 1D 28 4E 02 00 30 m Decimal 29 40 78 2 0 48 m [Defined Area] Thermal : n = 48 m = 49, 50 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : m = 49 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Specifies print color in 2-color print mode. m Print color 49 Black (High energy) 50 Red (Low energy) [Function] When underline mode is specified, the underline is also printed with the same color as this setting. When white/black inverted printing is specified, printing is inverted with the specified color. Printing color for graphics is set by GS ( L. This command is effective only when using 2-color printing mode. In single-color printing mode, the counter portion data is received and discarded. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-31

ESC % N [Name] Specify/cancel download character set [Code] ASCII ESC % n Hexadecimal 1B 25 n Decimal 27 37 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels download character set. When n = <*******0>B: Cancels the download character set When n = <*******1>B: Specifies the download character set [Details] When a download character set is canceled, automatically specifies an internal character set. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Two cannot be defined simultaneously because the download character (ESC &) and download bit image (GS *) use the same region. a. When defining a download character, the content of a previously defined download bit image is cleared. b. When defining a download bit image, the content of a previously defined download character is cleared, and the system returns to the same definition content as the internal character set. The setting using this command is valid for all stations and modes. [Reference] ESC &, ESC?, ESC @ 3-32

ESC & y c1 c2 [x1 d1...d (y x1 )]... [xk d1...d (y xk)] [Name] Define download characters [Code] ASCII ESC & y c1 c2 [x1 d1... d (y x1 )]... [ax d1... d (y ax)] Hexadecimal 1B 26 y c1 c2 [x1 d1... d (y x1 )]... [ax d1... d (y ax)] Decimal 27 38 y c1 c2 [x1 d1... d (y x1 )]... [ax d1... d (y ax)] [Defined Area] Thermal : y = 3 32 c1 c2 126 0 x 12 (Font A), 0 x 9 (Font B) 0 d1...d (y xk) 255 Slip : y = 2 32 c1 c2 126 0 x 6 (When Font A (5 x 9) is selected) 0 x 9 (When Font B (7 x 9) is selected) 0 d1...d (y xk) 255 ation : y = 2 32 c1 c2 126 0 x 6 (When Font A (5 x 9) is selected) 0 x 9 (When Font B (7 x 9) is selected) 0 d1...d (y xk ) 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : Same pattern as internal character set Slip : Same pattern as internal character set ation : Same pattern as internal character set [Function] Defines download characters to the character code specified for the currently selected character font. y: Specifies the byte count in the vertical direction. c1: Specifies the definition starting character code; c2: Specifies the definition ending character code x: Specifies the dot count of the horizontal direction that performs the definition. d: Definition data (column format) [Details] Definable character codes are in the range from ASCII code from <20>H to <7E>H. Definition data d set the bits that correspond to the dots to print to 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed to 0. This is a pattern from the left edge in the horizontal direction. At that time, if x does not satisfy the character configuration dot count, the remaining dots on the right side will be spaces. The necessary data count in the download character definition of 1 character is (y x) bytes. It is possible to define download characters independent to each font. Fonts can be selected using ESC! or ESC M. It is not possible to define the download characters (ESC &) and download bit images (GS *) simultaneously. a. When defining a download character, the content of a previously defined download bit image is cleared. b. When defining a download bit image, the content of a previously defined download character is cleared, and the system returns to the same definition content as the internal character set. Defined download characters are cleared in the following cases. a. Execution of printer initialization (ESC @) b. Execution of download bit image definition (GS *) c. Execution of deletion of download characters (ESC?) d. Execution of NV bit image definition (FS q) e. Reset or power is off Defined to the set sheet selected by ESC c 1. Thermal, Slip, ation can each be defined independently. Registered data is shared by slip and validation. In default, download characters are not defined. Prints internal font. It is possible to define multiple characters of character codes continuously with one definition. Also, when defining only one character, specify c1 = c2. New data overwrites predefined ASCII codes. [Reference] ESC c 1, ESC %, ESC?, ESC V 3-33

24Dots <Thermal> Definable character count is 95. [STAR] [Ex.:] STAR printer font configurations and parameter effective region Character Fonts Horizontal x y x Data Count Vertical Dots Font-A 12 x 24 Dots 3 12 36 Bytes Font-B 9 x 24 Dots 3 9 27 Bytes It is also possible to use ESC RS F for the font selection command on STAR printers. When Font-A (12 x 24) is selected: 12Dots MSB d1 d4 d34 d2 d5 d35 LSB d3 d6 d36 d1=<00>h d4<0f>h d7=<30>h d2=<00>h d5<03>h d8=<80>h d1=<00>h d4=<0f>h d7=<30>h d2=<00>h d3=<00>h d5=<03>h d6<00>h d8=<80>h d9=<c0>h d3=<00>h d6=<00>h d9=<c0>h 3-34

24 Dot [Ex.:] When Font-B (9 x 24) is selected: 9 Dot MSB d1 d4 d25 d2 d5 d26 LSB d3 d6 d27 d1=<00>h d1=<00>h d4=<ff>h d4=<ff>h d7=<40>h d7=<40>h d2=<00>h d5=<f3>h d5=<f3>h d8=<20>h d8=<20>h d3=<00>h d6=<f0>h d6=<f0>h d9=<00>h d9=<00>h 3-35

<Slip>, <ation> Definable character count is 22. Note Dots continuously adjacent in the horizontal direction cannot be printed. Data of two bytes in the vertical direction is valid only at the MSB. [Ex.:] When selecting Font-A (5 x 9), and defining the character to 21H: 5 Dot MSB d1 d3 d9 9 Dot LSB d2 d4 d10 ESC & y c1 c2 x d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 Code (Hex.) 1B 26 02 21 21 05 1C 00 22 80 22 80 22 80 3F 00 (1 when printing corresponding bits, and 0 for no print) 3-36

[Ex.:] When selecting Font-B (7 x 9), and defining the character to 21H: 9 Dot MSB d1 d3 d17 9 Dot LSB d2 d4 d18 ESC & y c1 c2 x d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d12 d13 d14 Code (Hex.) 1B 26 02 21 21 07 3E 00 40 00 88 00 00 00 88 00 40 00 3E 00 (1 when printing corresponding bits, and 0 for no print) 3-37

ESC? n [Name] Delete download characters [Code] ASCII ESC? n Hexadecimal 1B 3F n Decimal 27 63 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 32 n 126 Slip : 32 n 126 ation : 32 n 126 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Deletes download characters to the code specified for the currently selected character font. n indicates the character code that deletes the defined pattern. [Details] After deleting, prints the same pattern as the internal characters. It is possible to delete download characters independent to each font. Fonts can be selected using ESC! or ESC M. Deletes the download characters of the set sheet selected by ESC c 1. Thermal, Slip, ation can each be deleted independently. Registered data is shared by slip and validation. When the specified character code is not defined, 3 bytes are ignored. [Reference] ESC c 1, ESC &, ESC % 3-38

3-3-4) Printing Paper Related Commands ESC c 0 n [Name] Select printing sheet [Code] ASCII ESC c 0 n Hexadecimal 1B 63 30 n Decimal 27 99 48 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 4, n = 8 Slip : 1 n 4, n = 8 ation : 1 n 4, n = 8 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 3 Slip : n = 3 ation : n = 3 [Function] Selects the active sheet (printing sheet) targeted for printing. n Function 1, 2, 3 Specifies thermal 4 Specifies slip 8 Specifies validation This command cannot select MICR as the active sheet. Specify MICR using FS a 0. [Details] This command is valid only when sent at the top of the line when standard mode is selected. This command is ignored when page mode is selected. When the cut paper is valid at the beginning, the printer waits for the paper to be inserted. The printer continues waiting for the cut paper to be inserted until the following operations have been performed. Cut paper is inserted. Waiting time t1 set by ESC f is passed. Reset printer Power OFF It is possible to cancel the slip insertion wait state using DLE ENQ 3. In such cases, data in the pritner buffer and reception buffer is cleared. When the cut paper mode is invalid, the printer discharges the cut paper. When the active sheet currently selected is specified again, this command is ignored. It is possible to check the status of the cut paper in advance using the standard ASB status customized by GS ( B or the following commands. Slip: DLE EOT 5 (Slip status) ation: DLE EOT 6 (ation status) Note It is possible to select only one type of active sheet at a time. If the length of the cut sheet is too short, or is not correctly inserted, the printer will discharge the cut sheet and wait for another one to be inserted. The printer performs the following operations after checking whether the paper has been removed. [Reference] FS a 0, GS ( B, DLE ENQ 3, DLE EOT 5, DLE EOT 6 3-39

ESC c 1 n [Name] Select command setting sheet [Code] ASCII ESC c 1 n Hexadecimal 1B 63 31 n Decimal 27 99 49 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 4, n = 8 Slip : 1 n 4, n = 8 ation : 1 n 4, n = 8 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 3 Slip : n = 3 ation : n = 3 [Function] Selects the sheet (set sheet) targeted for the setting of this command. n Function 1, 2, 3 Specifies thermal 4 Specifies slip 8 Specifies validation [Details] It is necessary to execute the following commands after selecting the set sheet. All set sheets can be independently set. Set the initial line feed amount (ESC 2) Setting of the line feed amount (ESC 3) Set left margin (GS L) Set print region (GS W) Set Star original print region (ESC RS A) * Thermal, Slip, ation can each be set independently. (Settings shared by slip and validation) Define download characters (ESC &) Delete download characters (ESC?) Define download bit images (GS *) Set basic calculated pitch (GS P) Define external character (FS 2) * Slip, ation can each be set independently. Set cut paper waiting time (ESC f) Note It is possible to select only one type of set sheet at a time. [Reference] ESC 2, ESC 3, GS L, GS W, ESC W, ESC T, ESC RS A, ESC &, ESC?, GS *, GS P, FS 2, ESC f 3-40

ESC f t1 t2 Support difficult [Name] Set single docket waiting time [Code] ASCII ESC f t1 t2 Hexadecimal 1B 66 t1 t2 Decimal 27 102 t1 t2 [Defined Area] Thermal : - Slip : 0 t1 15 0 t2 64 ation : 0 t1 15 0 t2 64 [Initial Value] Thermal : - Slip : t1 = 0, t2 = MSW setting ation : t1 = 0, t2 = MSW setting [Function] <Thermal> 4 bytes ignored <Slip>, <ation> Sets cut paper insertion waiting time, and time from paper insert to start of operations. t1 sets waiting time for cut paper [t1 x 1 minute]. However, cancels waiting time when t1 = 0. At that time, the waiting time is [infinite]. t2 sets waiting time from paper insertion to starting operations [t2 x 0.1 sec.]. [Details] If paper is not inserted even if the set time for t1 is passed, the cut paper selection is canceled, and thermal is selected as the active sheet. At that time, if there is data in the print buffer, it is printed to thermal. When in the next state, the printer waits for cut paper to be inserted regardless of the setting of t1. When the paper sensor does not sense any paper: When the printer recovers from an error: It is possible to cancel the cut paper insertion waiting state using DLE ENQ 3. When doing so, the data in the print buffer and reception buffer is cleared. Note This command is valid only when slip or validation is selected using ESC c 1. Slip, ation can each be set independently. The settings for slip affect slip paper or check paper waiting status. [Reference] DLE ENQ, ESC c 1 3-41

GS ( G pl ph fn m <Function 48> Has Restrictions [Name] Select printer [Code] ASCII GS ( G pl ph fn m Hexadecimal 1d 28 47 02 00 30 m Decimal 29 40 71 2 0 48 m [Defined Area] Thermal : m = 4 Slip : m = 4 ation : m = 4 Thermal : Thermal is selected Slip : Thermal is selected ation : Thermal is selected [Function] Selects slip for the active sheet. m specifies slip. m Function 4 Selects slip [Details] This command is valid only when sent at the top of the line when standard mode is selected. This command is ignored when page mode is selected. Slip is selected for the printer as the active sheet. If slip has already been selected as the active sheet, this command is ignored. When the MICR function is selected, and this command is executed, the MICR function is canceled. The printer selects slip as the active sheet and feed functions such as paper discharge, wait for insertion and position print starting position and the like do not function. When thermal is selected as the active sheet, and this command is executed, the printer waits for slip paper to be inserted. When validation is selected as the active sheet, and this command is executed, the printer waits for slip paper to be inserted after discharging validation paper. The printer continues waiting for the slip paper to be inserted until the following operations have been performed. Slip paper is inserted. Waiting time t1 set by ESC f is passed. Reset printer Power OFF It is possible to cancel the slip paper insertion waiting state using DLE ENQ 3. When doing so, the data in the print buffer and reception buffer is cleared. It is possible to check the status of the cut paper in advance using DLE EOT 5 (slip status) or the customized standard ASB status. The slip paper removal waiting state is not canceled until slip paper is removed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. In this state can be checked using the ASB status customized by GS ( B. Note SLIP LED flashes while the printer is waiting for the slip paper to be discharged. When doing so, the printer checks whether slip paper has been discharged before performing the next process. [Reference] ESC f, DLE ENQ 3, DLE EOT 5, GS ( B 3-42

GS ( G pl ph fn m <Function 84> [Name] Feed paper to slip paper printing starting position [Code] ASCII GS ( G pl ph fn m Hexadecimal 1d 28 47 02 00 54 m Decimal 29 40 71 2 0 84 m [Defined Area] Thermal : - Slip : m = 1 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-43

3-3-5) Panel Switches Related Commands ESC c 5 n [Name] Enable/disable panel switches [Code] ASCII ESC c 5 n Hexadecimal 1B 63 35 n Decimal 27 99 53 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Switches to validate, and invalidate the panel switches. When n = <*******0>B: ates the panel switches. When n = <*******1>B: Invalidates the panel switches. [Details] [STAR] When all panel switches are valid, all panel switch functions are valid. Use this command to prevent mis-execution of the panel switch functions. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. When waiting switches in macro execution (GS ^), the paper feed switch is valid regardless of the setting of this command. However, a paper feed is not performed. All switches are invalid when the cover is open. [Reference] ESC @, GS ^ 3-44

3-3-6) Paper Out Sensor Related Commands ESC c 3 n [Name] Selects paper out sensor to validate at paper out signal output (Involves patent-related issues; Requires further study) [Code] ASCII ESC c 3 n Hexadecimal 1B 63 33 n Decimal 27 99 51 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] When paper is out, select the paper out detector that outputs the paper out signal using the specification of n. Bit Function 0 1 7 ation paper detector Invalid 6 ation paper detector Invalid 5 Slip BOF Detector Invalid 4 Slip COF Detector Invalid 3 Roll paper end detector Invalid 2 Roll paper end detector Invalid 1 Roll paper near end detector Invalid 0 Roll paper near end detector Invalid [Details] [STAR] This command is valid only when using a parallel interface. The command is ignored when any other interface is used. It is possible to select multiple paper out detectors at the same time. When multiple paper out detectors have been selected when any one of them has detected paper out, it outputs a paper out signal. If all detectors are selected to be invalid, the paper out signal constantly outputs that there is paper. When all detectors are disabled, the printer cannot notify the host that paper is out regardless of whether there is paper. When either Bit 0 and 1 is 1, select the roll paper near end detector as the valid paper out detector for the paper out signal output. When either Bit 2 and 3 is 1, select the roll paper end detector as the valid paper out detector for the paper out signal output. When either Bit 6 and 7 is 1, select the validation detector as the valid paper out detector for the paper out signal output. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. When this command is executed, the detector is switched, so a delay is generated in the paper out signal switch when this command is received depending on the reception buffer status. Only bits 2 and 3 are supported. Others are ignored. [Reference] ESC @ 3-45

ESC c 4 n [Name] Select paper out sensor to enable at printing stop [Code] ASCII ESC c 4 n Hexadecimal 1B 63 34 n Decimal 27 99 52 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 160 Slip : n = 160 ation : n = 160 [Function] Selects the paper out detector that stops printing when paper is out. Bit Function 0 1 7 ation paper detector Invalid 6 ation paper detector Invalid 5 Slip BOF Detector Invalid 4 Slip COF Detector Invalid 3 Roll paper end detector Invalid 2 Roll paper end detector Invalid 1 Roll paper near end detector Invalid 0 Roll paper near end detector Invalid [Details] When the near end state is detected, the printer prints the current line and printing stops after a paper feed. After printing stops, the printer goes offline and the PAPER LED blinks. It is possible to restart printing by refilling the roll paper and cancelling the near end state. When the near-end detector is invalid, printing does not stop even if the near end status is detected, and the printer does not go offline, but the PAPER LED blinks. When either Bit 0 and 1 is 1, select the roll paper near end detector as the valid paper out detector to stop printing. When roll paper is detected to be out, the same operations are executed as when the near end status is detected. When either Bit 2 and 3 is 1, select the roll paper end detector as the valid paper out detector to stop printing. When paper out is detected by the TOF or BOF detector valid setting for slip, after printing the data that it can, paper is discharged and the printer enters a paper wait state. The printer does not go offline. When paper out is detected by the TOF or BOF detector invalid setting for slip, the printer continues printing until paper is discharged. When either Bit 6 and 7 is 1, select the validation detector as the valid paper out detector to stop printing. When paper out is detected by the validation detector, the printer executes an operation that is the same as when the slip detector detects paper out. When a detector that supports the sheet selected using this command, as the active sheet using either GS ( G <Function 80> or ESC c 0, printing stops only when that detector has entered a paper out state. This command sets to validate or invalidate multiple detectors. Multiple detectors can be valid at the same time, and when either detector detects that the selected sheet is in a paper out state, printing is stopped. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. The roll paper end detector is always valid. When paper out is detected, printing is stopped. When paper out or a near end is detected, the PAPER OUT LED blinks. [Reference] ESC @, ESC c 0 3-46

3-3-7) Printing Position Related Commands HT [Name] Horizontal tab [Code] ASCII HT Hexadecimal 09 Decimal 9 [Defined Area] Thermal : Slip : ation : [Initial Value] Thermal : Slip : ation : [Function] Moves print position to next horizontal tab position. [Details] This command is ignored if the next tab is not set. The horizontal tab position is set by the horizontal tab position setting (ESC D). If the next tab position exceeds the print region, move the print position to [print region width + 1]. When this command is received when the the print position is at the [print region width + 1] position, the printer executes a buffer full print of the current line and horizontal tab from the top of the next line. Note that in page mode, printing is not performed and the printer moves to the top of the line only of the printing position. If anything other than the left margin position is specified even once using this command, the printer status will no longer be the top of the line. When underlines are enabled, an underline will not be added to the portion skipped by this command. The initial value of the horizontal tab position is every 8 th character of Font-A. (9 th position, 17 th position, 25 th position, ) [Reference] ESC D 3-47

ESC D n1...nk NUL [Name] Set horizontal tab position [Code] ASCII ESC D n1... nk NUL Hexadecimal 1B 44 n1... nk 00 Decimal 27 68 n1... nk 0 [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 255 0 k 32 Slip : 1 n 255 0 k 32 ation : 1 n 255 0 k 32 [Initial Value] Thermal : Font-A (12 x 24), when character right space amount setting = 0, every 8 th character (9 th position, 17 th position, 25 th position, ) Slip : Every 8 th character of Font-A (5 x 9) (9 th, 17 th, 25 th positions, ) ation : Every 8 th character of Font-A (5 x 9) (9 th, 17 th, 25 th positions, ) [Function] Sets the horizontal tab position. n specifies the position count from the left margin or top of the line to the setting position. k indicates the number of horizontal position data to set. [Details] The set horizontal tab position is [n x character width] from the left margin or top of the line. Character width is the horizontal width including the right space of the character (ESC SP). When the horizontal width magnification of the character is 2 times, the size increases accordingly. Change the character width before sending this command. The character width is affected by the current font, right space of the character and expansion rate. The maximum settable horizontal tab positions is 32 positions (k = 32). If this is exceeded, the subsequent data is handled as normal data. Preset horizontal tab positions are canceled. n that specifies the setting position, is input in ascending order and ends at the NUL code (00H). When n is equivalent or smaller than the previous n, the horizontal table setting process up to that point is ended and subsequent data is handled as normal data. Cancel all horizontal tab positions using ESC D NULL. Even if the character width is changed after setting the horizontal tab positions, the set horizontal tab positions do not change. Horizontal tabs set by standard mode and page mode are shared. When executing this command in standard mode, use the horizontal direction basic calculated pitch (x). a. When the starting point is set to upper left or lower right using the print direction selection (ESC T) in page mode, use the horizontal direction basic calculated pitch (x). b. When the starting point is set to upper right or lower left using the print direction selection (ESC T) in page mode, use the vertical direction basic calculated pitch (y). Set basic calculated pitch using GS P. The horizontal tab positions do not change even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after setting the horizontal tab positions. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. When the horizontal tab position is set to n = 8, the next print position is moved to the 9 th position by executing a horizontal tab (HT). When the Kanji mode is specified, this is set by the currently set ANK font (Font-A/Font-B) pitch. [Reference] HT, GS L, ESC @ 3-48

ESC $ nl nh [Name] Specify absolute position [Code] ASCII ESC $ nl nh Hexadecimal 1B 24 nl nh Decimal 27 36 nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) Slip : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) ation : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Moves the printing position from the left margin to the [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch] position. [Details] This command is ignored if the print region is exceeded. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. In standard mode, uses the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. In page mode, basic calculated pitch used by the beginning point is different. a. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper left or lower right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. b. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper right or lower left by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. After executing this command, the print position does not change even if the basic calculated pitch setting is changed. If anything other than the left margin position is specified even once using this command, the printer status will no longer be the top of the line. The top of line is maintained only when the same position as the left margin position is specified. When underlines are enabled, an underline will not be added to the portion skipped by this command. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. The right edge is also the reference for upside-down printing. <Thermal> When print data is overlapped, the OR process is applied to the old print data. [Reference] ESC T, ESC \, GS $, GS \, GS P 3-49

ESC \ nl nh [Name] Specify relative position [Code] ASCII ESC \ nl nh Hexadecimal 1B 5C nl nh Decimal 27 92 nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) Slip : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) ation : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Moves the printing position from the current position to the [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch]. [Details] This command is ignored if the print region is exceeded. When specifying a right direction from the current position for the character direction, specify a positive number; use a negative number for the left direction. When [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch] 32768, it moves {65536 [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch]} dots in the left direction. When [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch] < 32768, it moves [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch]} dots in the right direction. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. In standard mode, uses the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. In page mode, the following operations are used from the starting point. a. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper left or lower right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, specify the relative position of the perpendicular direction of paper feed. At that time, uses the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. b. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper right or lower left by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, move the print position in the paper feed direction. At that time, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. After executing this command, the print position does not change even if the basic calculated pitch setting is changed. If anything other than the left margin position is specified even once using this command, the printer status will no longer be the top of the line. The top of line is maintained only when the same position as the left margin position is specified. When underlines are enabled, an underline will not be added to the portion skipped by this command. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. The right edge is also the reference for upside-down printing. <Thermal> When print data is overlapped, the OR process is applied to the old print data. <Slip, ation> When print data is overlapped, the old print data is overwritten by new data (the portion that is overlapped is erased). However, the OR process is applied to old print data that is bit image data. [Reference] ESC $, GS P, ESC T 3-50

ESC a n [Name] Position alignment [Code] ASCII ESC a n Hexadecimal 1B 61 n Decimal 27 97 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 Slip : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 ation : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Aligns all print data of one line to the specified position. n Position 0, 48 Left alignment 1, 49 Center alignment 2, 50 Right alignment [Details] [Ex.:] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when input at the top of the line. This command does not affect page mode. When page mode is selected, only settings for this command are valid. Execute position alignment within the set print region width (GS L, GS W). Characters, graphics data, bit images, bar codes and two-dimensional bar codes are targeted for position alignment. Portions skipped by the following command are targeted data of position alignment. a. HT: Horizontal tab b. ESC $: Specify absolute position c. ESC \: Specify relative position This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. ABC Left alignment Center Right alignment ABCD ABCDE ABC ABCD ABCDE ABC ABCD ABCDE <Slip>, <ation> [STAR] Position alignment of horizontal tabs (HT) is not targeted. [Reference] ESC @, GS L, GS W, HT, ESC $, ESC \ 3-51

GS L nl nh [Name] Set left margin [Code] ASCII GS L nl nh Hexadecimal 1D 4C nl nh Decimal 29 76 nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) Slip : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) ation : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) [Initial Value] Thermal : MSW setting Slip : nl = 0, nh = 0 ation : nl = 0, nh = 0 [Function] Moves the left margin from the left edge of the print region to the position specified by [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch]. Printable Region Left Margin Print Region Width [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when input at the top of the line. When page mode is selected, this command does not affect page mode. Only the setting of this command is valid. This is a command set for the set sheet selected by ESC c 1. This setting can be made independently for all sheets. The maximum left margin that can be set is the same size as the horizontal direction printable region. Settings that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to the maximum value. Use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction of the setting (GS P) for the basic calculated pitch to calculate the left margin. The set left margin will not change even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after being set. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. The left margin is the left edge of the print region. When the left margin is changed, the right edge of the print region is changed. If the print area set by this command and GS W is less than one character, the print region is expanded to that line for the amount of one character. <Thermal> If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. When expanding the first character at the top of the line, and the print region width is smaller than the horizontal width (including the right space) of the character to be expanded, the following processes are performed for that line only. (1) The print region is expanded to the right side to a size that that character can be printed in a range that does not exceed the printable region. (2) The print region is expanded to the left side if an adequate region cannot be ensured even if (1) is performed. (3) The right space is deleted for ANK characters if an adequate region cannot be ensured even if (2) is performed. For Kanji, the left space is deleted first, then the right space is deleted if an adequate region cannot be ensured. To expand bit images, when the print region width does not satisfy the minimum horizontal width of the bit image, the following processes are performed only on that line. (1) The print region is expanded to the right side to a size equivalent to the minimum horizontal width of the bit image in a range that does not exceed the printable region. (2) The print region is expanded to the left if an adequate region cannot be ensured even if (1) is performed (left margin is reduced). 3-52

When the print region width is expanded, the bit image and minimum width are as outlined below. Bit image (ESC *): Single density: 2 dots/double density; 1 dot Download bit images (GS /): Double-wide mode, double-high, double wide: 2 dots Normal mode, vertical high mode: 1 dot NV bit image: (FS p): Double-wide mode, double-high, double wide: 2 dots Normal mode, vertical high mode: 1 dot Raster bit image (GS v 0): Double-wide mode, double-high, double wide: 2 dots Normal mode, vertical high mode: 1 dot For setting details, see Appendix 4. <Slip>, <ation> [STAR] If the printable region as set by the left margin and print region width (GS W) is smaller than one character including the right space of the character, printing is not possible. A question mark (?) is printed instead of the character. [Reference] ESC c 1, GS P, GS W, ESC @, Appendix 4 3-53

GS W nl nh [Name] Set print region [Code] ASCII GS W nl nh Hexadecimal 1D 57 nl nh Decimal 29 87 nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) Slip : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) ation : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) [Initial Value] Thermal : MSW Setting Slip : MSW Setting ation : MSW Setting [Function] Sets the print region width to [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch]. Printable Region Left Margin Print Region Width [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when processed at the top of the line. When page mode is selected, this command does not affect page mode. Only the setting of this command is valid. This is a command set for the set sheet selected by ESC c 1. This setting can be made independently for all sheets. When the [left margin + print region] exceeds the printable region, sets the [printable region left margin] as the printable region. Use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction of the setting (GS P) for the basic calculated pitch to calculate the printable region. The set print region width will not change even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after being set. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. If the print area set by this command and GS L is less than one character, the print region is expanded to that line for the amount of one character. <Thermal> If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. When expanding the first character at the top of the line, and the print region width is smaller than the horizontal width (including the right space) of the character to be expanded, the following processes are performed for that line only. (1) The print region is expanded to the right side to a size that that character can be printed in a range that does not exceed the printable region. (2) The print region is expanded to the right if an adequate region cannot be ensured even if (1) is performed. (3) The right space is deleted for ANK characters if an adequate region cannot be ensured even if (2) is performed. For Kanji, the left space is deleted first, then the right space is deleted if an adequate region cannot be ensured. To expand bit images, when the print region width does not satisfy the minimum horizontal width of the bit image, the following processes are performed only on that line. (1) The print region is expanded to the right side to a size equivalent to the minimum horizontal width of the bit image in a range that does not exceed the printable region. (2) The print region is expanded to the left if an adequate region cannot be ensured even if (1) is performed (left margin is reduced). 3-54

When the print region width is expanded, the bit image and minimum width are as outlined below. Bit image (ESC *): Single density: 2 dots/double density; 1 dot Download bit images (GS /): Double-wide mode, double-high, double wide: 2 dots Normal mode, vertical high mode: 1 dot NV bit image: (FS p): Double-wide mode, double-high, double wide: 2 dots Normal mode, vertical high mode: 1 dot Raster bit image (GS v 0): Double-wide mode, double-high, double wide: 2 dots Normal mode, vertical high mode: 1 dot For setting details, see Appendix 4. <Slip>, <ation> [STAR] If the print region as set by the left margin (GS L) and print region width (GS W) is smaller than one character including the right space of the character, printing is not possible. A question mark (?) is printed instead of the character. If bit images are set, only the portion of the print region is printed. The command is received and discarded for portions exceeding the print region. Also, if 0 is set for the print region, 5 bytes of the bit image command are ignored. [Reference] ESC c 1, GS L, GS P, Appendix 4 3-55

GS T n [Name] Move to top of line [Code] ASCII GS T n Hexadecimal 1D 54 n Decimal 29 84 n [Defined Area] Thermal : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 Slip : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 ation : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Moves print position to top of line. n Function 0, 48 Moves print position after deleting data in print buffer. 1, 49 Moves print position after printing data in print buffer. [Details] This command is valid only in standard mode. Ignored in page mode. This command is ignored when the current is the top of the line. The function when executed by n = 1, 49 is the same as LF. Command settings and reception buffer contents do not change. When this command is executed, the print position is top of line. After execution, the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. When using a command that valid only at the top of the line (left margin setting GS L and the like), it is executed using this command just prior to using these commands. [Reference] LF 3-56

D Paper Feed Direction ESC T n [Name] Select character print direction in page mode. [Code] ASCII ESC T n Hexadecimal 1B 54 n Decimal 27 84 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 3, 48 n 51 Slip : 0 n 3, 48 n 51 ation : 0 n 3, 48 n 51 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Select character print direction and starting point in page mode. n Printing Starting Point Direction 0, 48 Left to Right Upper Left (Drawing at Right A) 1, 49 Bottom to Top Bottom Left (Drawing at Right B) 2, 50 Right to Left Bottom Right (Drawing at Right C) 3, 51 Top to Bottom Top Right (Drawing at Right D) A Print Region BC [Details] This command sets the print direction. This command affects only page mode. Selected in page mode using ESC L, FS L. The start of character expansion is in the print region specified by the print region setting (ESC W) in page mode. The starting point changes the x and y of the basic calculated pitch (GS P) used with the following commands. a. When the starting point is upper left or bottom right (expanded characters in the perpendicular direction to the paper feed ) Commands that use x: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC \, FS S Commands that use y: ESC 3, ESC J, ESC K, GS $, GS \ b. When the starting point is upper right or lower left Commands that use x: ESC 3, ESC J, ESC K, GS $, GS \ Commands that use y: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC \, FS S The settings of this command are cleared and saved by FF, ESC FF, ESC S. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. When standard mode is selected, when this command s entered, only internal printer flag operations are executed. In that case, printing in standard mode is not affected. This command sets the print direction of the set shet selected by ESC c 1. [Reference] ESC L, FS L, ESC W, GS P, ESC SP, ESC $, ESC \, FS S, ESC 3, ESC J, ESC K, GS $, GS \, FF, ESC FF, ESC S, ESC c 1 3-57

ESC W xl xh yl yh dxl dxh dyl dyh [Name] Set print region in page mode [Code] ASCII ESC W xl xh yl yh dxl dxh dyl dyh Hexadecimal 1B 57 xl xh yl yh dxl dxh dyl dyh Decimal 27 87 xl xh yl yh dxl dxh dyl dyh [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 xl + xh 256 65535, 0 yl + yh 256 65535 1 dxl + dxh 256 65535, 1 dyl + dyh 256 65535 (0 xl, xh, yl, yh, dxl, dxh, dyl, dyh 255 ) However, this excludes dxl = dxh = 0 or dyl = dyh = 0 Slip : 0 xl + xh 256 65535, 0 yl + yh 256 65535 1 dxl + dxh 256 65535, 1 dyl + dyh 256 65535 (0 xl, xh, yl, yh, dxl, dxh, dyl, dyh 255 ) However, this excludes dxl = dxh = 0 or dyl = dyh = 0 ation : 0 xl + xh 256 65535, 0 yl + yh 256 65535 1 dxl + dxh 256 65535, 1 dyl + dyh 256 65535 (0 xl, xh, yl, yh, dxl, dxh, dyl, dyh 255 ) However, this excludes dxl = dxh = 0 or dyl = dyh = 0 [Initial Value] Thermal : xl = xh = yl = yh = 0 When in single-color mode: dxl + dxh 256 = 512 (dxl = 0, dxh = 2) dyl + dyh 256 = 1662 (dxl = 126, dxh = 6) When in 2-color mode: dxl + dxh 256 = 512 (dxl = 0, dxh = 2) dyl + dyh 256 = 831 (dxl = 63, dxh = 3) Slip : xl = xh = yl = yh = 0 When in standard mode: dxl + dxh 256 = 540 (dxl = 28, dxh = 2) dyl + dyh 256 = 1408 (dxl = 128, dxh = 5) When in double-density mode: dxl + dxh 256 = 540 (dxl = 28, dxh = 2) dyl + dyh 256 = 704 (dxl = 192, dxh = 2) ation : xl = xh = yl = yh = 0 When in standard mode: dxl + dxh 256 = 540 (dxl = 28, dxh = 2) dyl + dyh 256 = 1408 (dxl = 128, dxh = 5) When in double-density mode: dxl + dxh 256 = 540 (dxl = 28, dxh = 2 ) dyl + dyh 256 = 704 (dxl = 192, dxh = 2) [Function] Sets the position and size of the print region. Horizontal direction starting point = [(xl + xh 256) x basic calculated pitch] Vertical direction starting point = [(yl + yh 256) x basic calculated pitch] Length of Horizontal Direction = [(dxl + dxh 256) x basic calculated pitch] Length of Vertical Direction = [(dyl + dyh 256) x basic calculated pitch] [Details] This command affects only page mode. Selected in page mode using ESC L, FS L. The starting position of character expansion is the starting position specified by selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode in the print region. The horizontal in this command indicates the perpendicular to the print feed direction and vertical indicates the feed direction. It is not possible to set the print region width and height to 0. When the horizontal and vertical direction lengths are 0, the command is canceled and subsequent data is handled as normal data. When the horizontal and vertical direction starting points are outside of the printable region, this command is ignored. The starting point set by this command is the upper left of the printable region. The starting point in the horizontal direction set by this command is the left edge of the printable region. The starting point in the perpendicular direction set by this command is the top edge of the printable region. If the (horizontal direction starting point + horizontal direction length) exceeds the horizontal direction printable region, the (horizontal direction printable region horizontal direction starting point) becomes the horizontal direction length. If the (vertical direction starting point + vertical direction length) exceeds the vertical direction printable region, the (vertical direction printable region vertical direction starting point) becomes the vertical direction length. 3-58

This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. The basic calculated pitch (x) is used in the calculated pitch of the horizontal direction starting point and horizontal direction length. The basic calculated pitch (y) is used in the calculated pitch of the vertical direction starting point and vertical direction length The set print region will not change even if the basic calculated pitch setting (GS P) is changed after being set. When standard mode is selected, when this command s entered, only internal printer flag operations are executed. No affect on printing. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. If the horizontal direction starting point is X; the vertical direction starting point is Y; the horizontal direction length is Dx, the vertical direction length is Dy, the print region is as shown in the drawing below. For print region details, see Appendix 5. <Slip, ation> If a print region of over 18 dots at least cannot be ensured for the print direction, print data will be discarded. Therefore, when setting the print region with this command, it is recommended to set to more than 18 dots in the horizontal and vertical directions. (X,Y) Dx Paper Dy Print Region (X+Dx-1, Y+Dy-1) Paper Feed Direction [Reference] ESC L, FS L, ESC T, GS P, Appendix 5 3-59

GS $ nl nh [Name] Specify character vertical direction absolute position in page mode [Code] ASCII GS $ nl nh Hexadecimal 1D 24 nl nh Decimal 29 36 nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) Slip : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) ation : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Moves the position of the character vertical direction of the starting position for data expansion in page mode from the starting point to the [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch] position. [Details] This command is valid only in page mode. Selected in page mode using ESC L, FS L. If print region set by ESC W is exceeded, the absolute position specification is ignored. The starting point that is a reference is specified by ESC T. The starting point of the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode in the print region causes the following operations. a. When the starting point is upper left or bottom right, specify the absolute position of the paper feed direction (character vertical direction). At that time, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. b. When the starting point is upper right or bottom left, specify the absolute position of the perpendicular direction to the paper feed (character vertical direction). At that time, uses the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. After executing this command, the print position does not change even if the basic calculated pitch setting is changed. The position of the character horizontal direction of the data expansion starting position does not move. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. [Reference] ESC L, FS L, ESC W, ESC T, GS P, Appendix 5 3-60

GS \ nl nh [Name] Specify character vertical direction relative position in page mode [Code] ASCII GS \ nl nh Hexadecimal 1D 5C nl nh Decimal 29 92 nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) Slip : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) ation : 0 nl + nh 256 65535 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 255) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Moves the position of the character vertical direction of the starting position for data expansion in page mode from the current position to the [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch] position. [Details] This command is valid only in page mode. Selected in page mode using ESC L, FS L. If print region set by ESC W is exceeded, the relative position specification is ignored. When specifying a right direction from the current position for the character direction, specify a positive number; use a negative number for the left direction. When [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch] 32768, it moves {65536 [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch]} dots in the upward direction. When [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch] < 32768, it moves [(nl + nh x 256) x basic calculated pitch]} dots in the downward direction. The selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode in the print region causes the following operations. a. When the starting point is upper left or bottom right, specify the absolute position of the paper feed direction. At that time, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. b. When the starting point is upper right or bottom left, specify the relative position of the perpendicular direction to the paper feed. At that time, uses the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. After executing this command, the print position does not change even if the basic calculated pitch setting is changed. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. [Reference] ESC L, FS L, ESC W, ESC T, GS P, Appendix 5 3-61

3-3-8) Bit Image Graphics Related Commands ESC * m nl nh d1...dk [Name] Specify bit image mode [Code] ASCII ESC * m nl nh d1... dk Hexadecimal 1B 2A m nl nh d1... dk Decimal 27 42 m nl nh d1... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : m = 0, 1, 32, 33 1 nl + nh 256 1023 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 3) k = nl + nh 256 (m = 0, 1 ) k = (nl + nh 256) 3 (m = 32, 33) 0 d 255 Slip : m = 0, 1 (Standard Mode, Double-density Page Mode) m = 0 (Page Mode) 1 nl + nh 256 1023 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 3) k = nl + nh 256 0 d 255 ation : m = 0, 1 (Standard Mode, Double-density Page Mode) m = 0 (Page Mode) 1 nl + nh 256 1023 (0 nl 255, 0 nh 3) k = nl + nh 256 0 d 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Prints bit image specified by m. nl, nh indicate the horizontal direction dot count of the bit image to be printed and are [nl + nh x 256]. d indicates the bit image data. (Column format). [Details] k byte data d1 dk are processed as bit image data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0. If m is outside of the definition, data after nl is processed as normal data. If bit image data is input that exceeds the printable dot count for one line, that excess data is read and discarded. When the current position exceeds the print region of one line and this command is sent, printing of the print buffer is performed, and that data is handed as data for the next line after a line feed. Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted, and 90 rotation) are unaffected. When in 2-color print mode, the bit image is printed with the selected color. When processing of the bit image is ended, the system returns to normal data processing. When this command is executed, the print position moves to [current position + (nl + nh 256)]. The printer status is set to the top of line and print data in print buffer. This command is used in printing pictures of logos. The relationship of the bit image data and print results is shown after the next page. See Appendix 5 Page Mode for details on the bit image expanding position in page mode. Note The bit image mode that can be specified differs according to the print sheet. 3-62

<Thermal> <Standard Mode, Page Mode (When Printing Left to Right)> m Mode: Vert. Dir. Vert. Dir. Hor. Dir. Maximum Data Dot Count Dot Density Dot Density Count 0 8-Dot Single Density 8 60 DPI 90 DPI 256 dots 1 8-Dot Double Density 8 60 DPI 180 DPI 512 dots 32 24-Dot Single Density 24 180 DPI 90 DPI 256 dots 33 24-Dot Double Density 24 180 DPI 180 DPI 512 dots <Page Mode (When Printing Top to Bottom)> m Mode Vert. Dir. Dot Count Vert. Dir. Dot Density Hor. Dir. Dot Density Max. Data Count (2-color Mode) Max. Data Count (Single-color Mode) 0 8-Dot Single Density 8 90 DPI 60 DPI 207 dots 415 dots 1 8-Dot Double Density 8 180 DPI 60 DPI 415 dots 831 dots 32 24-Dot Single Density 24 90 DPI 180 DPI 207 dots 415 dots 33 24-Dot Double Density 24 180 DPI 180 DPI 415 dots 831 dots [STAR] Dot density of STAR printers (STAR printer head: 203 DPI) m Mode Vertical Direction Dot Density Horizontal Direction Dot Density 0 8-Dot Single Density 67 DPI 101 DPI 1 8-Dot Double Density 67 DPI 203 DPI 32 24-Dot Single Density 203 DPI 101 DPI 33 24-Dot Double Density 203 DPI 203 DPI Fonts A and B and Kanji characters can be used together. <8Dots Single Density> MSB d1 d2 d3 LSB 24Dots <8Dots Double Density> MSB d1 d2 d3 LSB 24Dots <24Dots Single Density> d1 d4 d7 MSB 3-63

<24Dots Single Density> d1 d4 d7 MSB d2 d5 d8 LSB 24Dots d3 d6 d9 d1 <24Dots Double Density> d4 d7 MSB d2 d5 d8 LSB 24Dots d3 d6 d9 <Slip>, <ation> When printing multiple lines of bit images, and printing in one direction is selected by ESC U, it is possible to print with the top and bottom aligned. <Standard Mode, Page Mode (When Printing Left to Right)> m Mode Vert. Dir. Dot Count Vert. Dir. Dot Density Hor. Dir. Dot Density Max. Data Count (Page Mode) Max. Data Count (Other than Page Mode) 0 8-Dot Single Density 8 72 DPI 80 DPI 270 dots 270 dots 1 8-Dot Double Density 8 72 DPI 160 DPI --- dots 540 dots m <Page Mode (When Printing Top to Bottom)> Mode Vert. Dir. Dot Count Vert. Dir. Dot Density Hor. Dir. Dot Density Max. Data Count (Page Mode) Max. Data Count (Other than Page Mode) 0 8-Dot Single Density 8 72 DPI 80 DPI 704 dots 352 dots 1 8-Dot Double Density 8 144 DPI 80 DPI --- dots 704 dots The following drawing shows the relationship of the bit image data and printed dots. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 [Bit-image data] Top Bottom HEAD1 HEAD2 HEAD3 HEAD4 HEAD5 HEAD6 HEAD7 HEAD8 HEAD9 [Print data] [Reference] ESC U 3-64

FS p n m [Name] Print NV bit image [Code] ASCII FS p n m Hexadecimal 1C 70 n m Decimal 28 112 n m [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 255 0 m 3, 48 m 51 Slip : 1 n 255 m = 0, 1, 48, 49 m = 1, 49 ation : 1 n 255 m = 0, 1, 48, 49 m = 1, 49 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - (Standard Mode, Double-density Page Mode) (Page Mode) (Standard Mode, Double-density Page Mode) (Page Mode) [Function] Prints NV bit image registration number n according to the print mode m. n: Specified logo number m: See STAR on the next page for the print mode. This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( L, GS 8 L <Function 51>, <Function 64 to 69> are recommended for the NV graphics function. [Details] NV bit images can be defined to the non-volatile memory by the NV bit image definition (FS q) and printed using this command. This command is ignored if the specified NV bit image n is not defined. When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when the current position is at the top of the line and there is data in the print buffer. If there is data, 4 bytes are ignored. When in page mode, data is only expanded to the print buffer, but printing is not executed. If a size of bit image is specified that exceeds the print region, data in the print region is targeted, but the excess portion is not printed. The vertical and horizontal sizes of the NV bit image is specified by m. 90º and 270º rotated printing in page mode applies the print region of width: paper feed direction and height: perpendicular direction to paper feed direction and the dot density. Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted printing, and 90 right rotation) are unaffected. Regardless of the line feed amount set by the initial line feed amount setting (ESC 2) and line feed amount setting (ESC 3), paper feeds are executed for the number of dots (NV bit mode n height) when normal mode and double-wide mode are specified, and for the number of dots (NV bit mode n height x 2) when double-high mode and double-high, double-wide mode are specified. After printing this bit image, the top of the line is set at the next printing position (the printer status is top of line and no print data ) and the printer executes normal data processing. When printing NV bit images, and printing in one direction is selected by ESC U, it is possible to print with the top and bottom aligned. This command is affected by the following command settings. Position alignment (ESC a n) Absolute position movement (ESC $ n1 n2) Relative position movement (ESC \ n1 n2) Print region setting (ESC RS A n) Horizontal tab (HT) Upside-down printing (ESC { n) When in 2-color print mode, the NV bit image is printed with the selected color. See Appendix 5 Page Mode for details on the NV bit image expansion position in page mode. 3-65

[STAR] <Thermal> m Mode Vertical Direction Dot Density Horizontal Direction Dot Density 0, 48 Normal mode 180 DPI 180 DPI 1, 49 Double-wide Mode 180 DPI 90 DPI 2, 50 Double-high Mode 90 DPI 180 DPI 3, 51 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 90 DPI 90 DPI Dot density of STAR printers (STAR printer head: 203 DPI) m Mode Vertical Direction Dot Density Horizontal Direction Dot Density 0, 48 Normal mode 203 DPI 203 DPI 1, 49 Double-wide Mode 203 DPI 101 DPI 2, 50 Double-high Mode 101 DPI 203 DPI 3, 51 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 101 DPI <Slip>, <ation> Standard Mode m Horizontal Direction Dot Density (DPI) Max. Printing Region Vertical Direction Dot Density (DPI) Remarks 0, 48 Double density (160) 540 dots Standard density (72) 1, 49 Standard density (80) 270 dots Standard density (72) m When the print starting position setting is upper left or lower right Horizontal Direction Dot Density (DPI) Maximum Print Region Double-density Page mode Page mode 0, 48 Double density (160) - 540 dots 1, 49 Standard density (80) 270 dots 270 dots m Vertical Direction Dot Density (DPI) Standard density (72) Standard density (72) When the print starting position setting is upper right or lower left Horizontal Direction Dot Density (DPI) Maximum Print Region Double-density Page mode Page mode 0, 48 Double density (144) - 1408 dots 1, 49 Standard density (72) 704 dots 704 dots In this case, printing is performed in 90º and 270º. Vertical Direction Dot Density (DPI) Standard density (80) Standard density (80) Maximum Print Region Page Double-density mode Page mode - 704 dots 704 dots 704 dots Maximum Print Region Page Double-density mode Page mode - 270 dots 270 dots 270 dots For double-wide density, data that is continuously ON in the horizontal direction, the printer automatically thins out the data. In such cases, right side data of the data that is continuously ON is forced OFF. [Reference] GS ( L/GS 8 L, FS q, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC a, ESC $, ESC \, ESC RS A, HT, ESC { 3-66

FS q n [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]1... [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]n [Name] Define NV bit image [Code] ASCII FS q n [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]1...[xl xh yl yh d1... dk]n Hexadecimal 1C 71 n [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]1...[xl xh yl yh d1... dk]n Decimal 28 113 n [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]1...[xl xh yl yh d1... dk]n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 255 1 (xl + xh 256 ) 1023 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 3) 1 (yl + yh 256 ) 288 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 1) 0 d 255 k = (xl + xh 256) (yl + yh 256) 8 Total defined region = 4MBit (512KByte) Slip : 1 n 255 1 (xl + xh 256) 1023 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 3) 1 (yl + yh 256) 288 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 1) 0 d 255 k = (xl + xh 256) (yl + yh 256) 8 Total defined region = 4MBit (512KByte ) ation : 1 n 255 1 (xl + xh 256) 1023 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 3) 1 (yl + yh 256) 288 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 1) 0 d 255 k = (xl + xh 256) (yl + yh 256) 8 Total defined region = 4MBit (512KByte) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Defines specified NV bit image. n specifies the number of NV bit images to define. xl and xh specify the horizontal direction of one NV bit image to (xl + xh 256 ) 8 dots. yl and yh specify the vertical direction of one NV bit image to (yl + yh 256 ) 8 dots. d indicates the NV bit image data. (Column format). [Details] This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( L, GS 8 L <Function 51>, <Function 64 to 69> are recommended for the NV graphics function. NV bit images can be defined to the non-volatile memory by this command, and printed using the NV bit image print command FS p. When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when processed at the top of the line. When page mode is selected, this command is invalid. (After receiving 2 bytes, subsequent data is handled as normal data.) When this command is processed during macro definition, the macro definition is canceled and processing of this command is started. The macro remains undefined. k byte data d1 dk are processed as NV bit image data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0. Processing of this command deletes all NV bit images already defined. For that reason, it is not possible to redefine only one of the multiple data already defined. In that case, all data must be resent. After processing of the command, executes a printer reset. Therefore, the status is the same as when the power is turned on after the reset. The following restrictions on processing apply from the time the command is processed until the hardware is reset. Real-time command cannot be executed. When the ASB function is specified, ASB status transmission and status detection cannot be executed. 3-67

This command is executed only for definition of the NV bit image and does not accompany the printing operation. Printing of the NV bit image is done by FS p (print NV bit image). Data is written to the non-volatile memory by this command. Be careful of the following when using this command. Do not turn off the power or reset the printer from the interface while executing this command. The printer is BUSY just prior to writing to the non-volatile memory. For models equipped with the DIP switches [Conditions for BUSY], the printer is BUSY just prior to writing regardless of the [Conditions for BUSY] settings. The printer cannot receive data, so data is not sent from the host. If this command is used frequently, there is the possibility of damaging the non-volatile memory. Write to the non-volatile memory about one time a day. Note This command is ignored if top of line is not possible, or the parameter is out of range. Ex.: If the defined area specified by the parameter is not empty, or if there is an error in the parameter specification, register processing is exited. (The pre-registered and complete data is effective.) If an argument outside of the definition is processed with a second and subsequent NV bit image data group, stop processing this command and start writing to the non-volatile memory. The NV bit image (undefined) being defined at that time will become invalid. NV bit images before that will be valid. Define NV bit images of n images in rising order from NV bit image number 01H. Therefore, the first data group [xl xh yl yh d1...dk] is an NV bit image of number 01H. The last data group [xl xh yl yh d1...dk] is an NV bit image of number n. This matches with the NV bit image specified by print NV bit image (FS p). One NV bit image defined data is composed by [xl xh yl yh d1...dk]. Therefore, to define only one NV bit image, n = 1. Process the data group of [xl xh yl yh d1...dk] once and use the non-volatile memory of ([Data: (xl + xh 256) (yl + yh 256 ) 8] + [Data: 4]). The NV memory capacity is 4 Mbits (512 Kbytes = 524,288 bytes). However, 4 Kbytes (4,096 bytes) are kept as parameter information separate to the data so the data region memory capacity is 520,192 Bytes. When the registered data size per each one is 6 Kbytes (6,144 bytes), it is possible to register 520,192/6144 = 84. It is possible to define multiple NV bit images, but it is not possible to define NV bit images whose total volume (bit image data + header) that exceed the maximum definition region. NV bit images that have been defined once cannot be initialized by initialing the printer (ESC @), resetting the printer, or by turning off the power. The relationships between input data and the actual print are shown on the next page. It is possible to print NV bit images defined with this function to all sheets. 3-68

[Ex.:] For xl = 50, xh = 0, yl = 96, yh = 0 When xl = 50, xh = 0, yl = 96, yh = 0 (xl + xh x 256) x 8 dots = 400 dots d1 d97 MSB d38305 d2 d98 d38306 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : LSB : : : : : : : : (yl + yh x 256) x 8 dots = 768 dots : : : : : : : : : : : : d96 d38400 Data specification order (example of the above) d1 d2 d96 d97 d98 d38305 d38306 d38400 [Reference] FS p, GS ( L/GS 8 L 3-69

GS * x y d1... d (x y 8 ) [Name] Define download bit images [Code] ASCII GS * x y d1...d (x y 8 ) Hexadecimal 1D 2A x y d1...d (x y 8 ) Decimal 29 42 x y d1...d (x y 8 ) [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 x 255, 1 y 48 (However, 1 x y 1536) 0 d 255 k = x y 8 Slip : 1 x 255, 1 y 48 (However, 1 x y 1536) 0 d 255 k = x y 8 ation : 1 x 255, 1 y 48 (However, 1 x y 1536) 0 d 255 k = x y 8 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Defines download bit images of the dot count specified by x, and y. x specifies the dot count of the horizontal direction. y specifies the byte count in the vertical direction. d indicates the bit image data to define. (Column format). This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( L, GS 8 L <Function 52>, <Function 80 to 85> are recommended for the NV graphics function. [Details] Horizontal direction dot count is x x 8 dots; vertical direction dot count is y x 8 dots. k byte data d1 dk are one NV graphics data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0. Initial value of download bit images is not defined. Defined download bit images are cleared in the following cases. a. ESC @ : Execution of printer initialization b. ESC & : Execution of download character definition c. Reset or power is off It is not possible to define the download bit images (GS *) and download characters (ESC &) simultaneously. The defined contents of the download characters are cleared when this command is executed. Download bit images are printed by GS /. The relationships between download bit images and print data are shown on the next page. Note Download bit images are defined to the set sheet selected by ESC c 1. Download bit images can be defined independently for thermal, slip, validation. Download bit images are shared by slip, and validation. 3-70

x x 8 dots d1 dy+1 dyx2+1 MSB d2 dy+2 dyx2+2 : : : LSB : : : : : y x 8 dots : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : dy dy x 2 dy x 3 dx x y x 8 [Reference] GS /, GS ( L/GS 8 L, ESC &, ESC @ 3-71

GS / m [Name] Print download bit images [Code] ASCII GS / m Hexadecimal 1D 2F m Decimal 29 47 m [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 m 3, 48 m 51 Slip : 0 m 1, 48 m 49 ation : 0 m 3, 48 m 51 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Defined download bit image data is printed by mode m. See STAR on the next page for the print mode. This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( L, GS 8 L <Function 52>, <Function 80 to 85> are recommended for the NV graphics function. [Details] This command is ignored if download bit image data is not defined. When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when there is data in the print buffer. This command is ignored if data exists in print buffer. When in page mode, data is only expanded to the print buffer, but printing is not executed. If a size of bit image is specified that exceeds the print region, data in the print region is targeted, but the excess portion is not printed. The vertical and horizontal sizes of the download bit image is specified by m. 90º and 270º rotated printing in page mode applies the print region of width: paper feed direction and height: perpendicular direction to paper feed direction and the dot density. Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted printing, and 90 right rotation) are unaffected. Regardless of the line feed amount set by the initial line feed amount setting (ESC 2) and line feed amount setting (ESC 3), paper feeds are executed for the number of dots (download bit image height) when normal mode and horizontal magnified mode are specified, and for the number of dots (download bit image height x 2) when vertical high mode and double-high, double-wide mode are specified. After printing this bit image, the top of the line is set at the next printing position (the printer status is top of line and no print data ) and the printer executes normal data processing. When printing download bit images, and printing in one direction is selected by ESC U, it is possible to print with the top and bottom aligned. Download bit images are defined by GS *. This command is affected by the following command settings. Position alignment (ESC a n) Absolute position movement (ESC $ n1 n2) Relative position movement (ESC \ n1 n2) Print region setting (ESC RS A n) Horizontal tab (HT) Upside-down printing (ESC { n) When in 2-color print mode, the download bit image is printed with the selected color. See Appendix 5 Page Mode for the expansion position of download bit images in page mode. Note It is possible to print with this function to all sheets. This function prints to each defined sheet download bit images. 3-72

[STAR] <Thermal> m 0, 48 1, 49 2, 50 3, 51 Print Mode Hor. Dir. Dot Density Max. Printing Region Vert. Dir. Dot Density Max. Print Region (2-color) Max. Print Region (Single-color) Normal mode 180 DPI 512 dots 180 DPI 415 dots 831 dots Double-wide Mode 90 DPI 256 dots 180 DPI 415 dots 831 dots Double-high Mode 180 DPI 512 dots 90 DPI 207 dots 415 dots Double-high, 90 DPI 256 dots 90 DPI 207 dots 415 dots Double-wide Mode The maximum print region of the vertical direction in page mode Dot density of STAR printers (STAR printer head: 203 DPI) m Mode Horizontal Direction Dot Density Vertical Direction Dot Density 0, 48 Normal mode 203 DPI 203 DPI 1, 49 Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 203 DPI 2, 50 Double-high Mode 203 DPI 101 DPI 3, 51 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 101 DPI <Slip>, <ation> Standard Mode m Horizontal Direction Dot Max. Vertical Direction Dot Density (DPI) Printing Region Density (DPI) 0, 48 Double density (160) 540 dots Standard density (72) 1, 49 Standard density (80) 270 dots Standard density (72) Remarks m 0, 48 1, 49 m 0, 48 1, 49 When the print starting position setting is upper left or lower right Hor. Dir. Dot Density (DPI) Double density (160) Standard density (80) Maximum Print Region Page Double-density Mode Page Mode - 540 dots 270 dots 270 dots Vert. Dir. Dot Density (DPI) Standard density (72) Standard density (72) When the print starting position setting is upper right or lower left Hor. Dir. Dot Density (DPI) Maximum Print Region Double-density Page Mode Page Mode Vert. Dir. Dot Density (DPI) Maximum Print Region Page Double-density Mode Page Mode - 704 dots 704 dots 704 dots Page Mode Maximum Print Region Double-density Page Mode Double density Standard density - 1408 dots (144) (80) - 270 dots Standard density Standard density 704 dots 704 dots (72) (80) 270 dots 270 dots In this case, printing download bit images is performed with 90º and 270º rotation. For double-wide density, data that is continuously ON in the horizontal direction, the printer automatically thins out the data. In such cases, right side data of the data that is continuously ON is forced OFF. [Reference] GS *, GS ( L/GS 8 L, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC a, ESC $, ESC \, ESC RS A, HT, ESC { 3-73

GS v 0 m xl xh yl yh d1...dk [Name] Print the raster bit image [Code] ASCII GS v 0 m xl xh yl yh d1... dk Hexadecimal 1D 76 30 m xl xh yl yh d1... dk Decimal 29 118 48 m xl xh yl yh d1... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 m 3, 48 m 51 1 xl + xh 256 128 (1 xl 128, xh = 0) 1 yl + yh 256 4095 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 15) 0 d 255 k = (xl + xh 256) (yl + yh 256) Slip : m = 0, 1, 48, 49 (Standard Mode, Double-density Page Mode) m = 1, 49 (Page Mode) 1 xl + xh 256 128 (1 xl 128, xh = 0) 1 yl + yh 256 4095 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 15) 0 d 255 k = (xl + xh 256 ) (yl + yh 256) ation : m = 0, 1, 48, 49 (Standard Mode, Double-density Page Mode) m = 1, 49 (Page Mode) 1 xl + xh 256 128 (1 xl 128, xh = 0) 1 yl + yh 256 4095 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 15) 0 d 255 k = (xl + xh 256 ) (yl + yh 256) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Raster type bit image data is printed by mode m. See STAR on the next page for the print mode. xl and xh specify the horizontal direction data count of a bit image to (xl + xh 256) bytes. yl and yh specify the vertical direction data count of a bit image to (yl + yh 256) dots. d indicates the bit image data. (Raster format). This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( L, GS 8 L <Function 50>, <Function 112> are recommended for the NV graphics function. [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when there is data in the print buffer. If data exists in the print buffer, data after m is handled as normal data. When in page mode, data is only expanded to the print buffer, but printing is not executed. k byte data d1 dk are processed as raster bit image data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0. If a size of bit image is specified that exceeds the print region, data in the print region is targeted, but the excess portion is not printed. The vertical and horizontal sizes of the raster bit image are specified by m. 90º and 270º rotated printing in page mode applies the print region of width: paper feed direction and height: perpendicular direction to paper feed direction and the dot density. Raster bit images are unaffected by the settings of emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted printing, upside-down printing and 90 right rotation. Regardless of the line feed amount set by the initial line feed amount setting (ESC 2) and line feed amount setting (ESC 3), paper feeds are executed for the number of dots (raster bit image height) when normal mode and horizontal magnified mode are specified, and for the number of dots (raster bit image height x 2) when vertical high mode and double-high, double-wide mode are specified. This command must not be used when defining a macro. This command cannot define to macros. When this command is processed during macro definition, the macro definition is canceled and processing of this command is started. The macro remains undefined. 3-74

After printing this raster bit image, the top of the line is set at the next printing position (the printer status is top of line and no print data ) and the printer executes normal data processing. This command is affected by the following command settings. However, if the print starting position is not a multiple of 8, the print speed can sometimes drop. Position alignment (ESC a n) Absolute position movement (ESC $ n1 n2) Relative position movement (ESC \ n1 n2) Print region setting (ESC RS A n) Horizontal tab (HT) Left margin (GS L nl nh) Print region (GS W nl nh) When in 2-color print mode, the raster bit image is printed with the selected color. See Appendix 5 Page Mode for the expansion position of raster bit images in page mode. Note It is possible to print with this function to all sheets. [STAR] <Thermal> m Mode Vertical Direction Dot Density Horizontal Direction Dot Density 0, 48 Normal mode 180 DPI 180 DPI 1, 49 Double-wide Mode 180 DPI 90 DPI 2, 50 Double-high Mode 90 DPI 180 DPI 3, 51 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 90 DPI 90 DPI The ACK pulse width for parallel interfaces on STAR printers is fixed at 1 μsec. Dot density of STAR printers (STAR printer head: 203 DPI) m Mode Vertical Direction Dot Density Horizontal Direction Dot Density 0, 48 Normal mode 203 DPI 203 DPI 1, 49 Double-wide Mode 203 DPI 101 DPI 2, 50 Double-high Mode 101 DPI 203 DPI 3, 51 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 101 DPI <Slip>, <ation> Standard Mode m Horizontal Direction Max. Vertical Direction Dot Dot Density (DPI) Printing Region Density (DPI) 0, 48 Double density (160) 540 dots Standard density (72) 1, 49 Standard density (80) 270 dots Standard density (72) Remarks When the print starting position setting is upper left or lower right Maximum Print Region m Hor. Dir. Page Double-density Vert. Dir. Dot Density (DPI) Mode Page Mode Dot Density (DPI) 0, 48 Double density (160) - 540 dots Standard density (72) 1, 49 Standard density (80) 270 dots 270 dots Standard density (72) Maximum Print Region Page Double-density Mode Page Mode - 704 dots 704 dots 704 dots 3-75

When the print starting position setting is upper right or lower left m 0, 48 1, 49 Hor. Dir. Dot Density (DPI) Double density (144) Standard density (72) Maximum Print Region Page Double-density Mode Page Mode - 1408 dots 704 dots 704 dots Vert. Dir. Dot Density (DPI) Standard density (80) Standard density (80) Maximum Print Region Page Double-density Mode Page Mode - 270 dots 270 dots 270 dots In this case, printing is performed in 90º and 270º. For double-wide density, data that is continuously ON in the horizontal direction, the printer automatically thins out the data. In such cases, right side data of the data that is continuously ON is forced OFF. [Ex.:] When xl + xh 256 = 64 (xl+xhx256) x 8dot = 512 dot 1 2 3 63 64 65 66 67 127 128 (yl + yh x 256) dot k-1 k 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSB LSB [Reference] GS ( L/GS 8 L, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC a, ESC $, ESC \, ESC RS A, HT, GS L, GS W 3-76

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 48> [Name] Send NV graphics memory capacity [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C 02 00 30 fn Decimal 29 40 76 2 0 48 fn [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C 02 00 00 00 30 fn Decimal 29 56 76 2 0 0 0 48 fn [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + ph 256 = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 2 (p1 = 2, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 0, 48 Slip : pl + ph 256 = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0 ) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 2 (p1 = 2, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 0, 48 ation : pl + ph 256 = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 2 (p1 = 2, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 0, 48 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Send total NV graphics memory region capacity in Bytes. [Details] Sends the number of bytes in the following format. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 30H 48 1Byte Total capacity *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 8Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte The total capacity is the total number of bytes in this region. The decimal value indicating the total capacity is converted to text data and sent in order from the MSB. Ex.: When the total capacity is 1200 bytes: 1200 (Hex:31H, 32H, 30H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48, 48) is converted to 4-bytes of data. This command is used when sending total capacity, and the total byte capacity of the region is sent regardless of the current setting for the NV graphics data. This total capacity includes the information region. When the value that indicates the entire capacity is 0 (Hex:30H, Decimal:48), it is not possible to use the NV graphics function. 3-77

Note Data transmission process: Function 48, 51, 52, 64 Observe the following rules when using these functions. When the host PC sends this command, the printer sends response data or the status to the PC. The PC does not send any more data until it receives response data or status from the printer. When using a serial interface, configure operations for the host PC to use the printer only while the printer is in the READY state. When using a parallel interface, data sent by this function ([header to NUL] block) is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer of the printer in the same way as other data. When the host PC enters reverse mode, data is sent from the top of the transmission buffer in order. When the amount of data exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer, data is erased. When using this command, it is important to set operations so that the host PC immediately enters a reverse mode and quickly processes the status transmission. When using the Xon/Xoff mode communications of the serial interface, it is possible to use Xoff in a data string of [header to NUL]. Transmission information of each function can be identified as other transmission data by specific data (identifier) of the transmission data string. When the header sent by the printer is [Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55], data up to NUL [Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0] is handled as one group, and identified by corresponding to the combination of the header and identifier. 3-78

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 51> [Name] Send remaining NV graphics memory capacity [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C 02 00 30 fn Decimal 29 40 76 2 0 48 fn [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C 02 00 00 00 30 fn Decimal 29 56 76 2 0 0 0 48 fn [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + ph 256 = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 2 (p1 = 2, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 3, 51 Slip : pl + ph 256 = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 2 (p1 = 2, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 3, 51 ation : pl + ph 256 = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 2 (p1 = 2, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 3, 51 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Send total NV graphics memory region capacity (in Bytes of the unused region). [Details] Sends the number of bytes in the following format. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 31H 49 1Byte Unused capacity *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 8Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte *1 The unused capacity is the total number of bytes of the unused region. The decimal value indicating the total capacity is converted to text data and sent in order from the MSB. Ex.: When the total capacity is 120 bytes: 120 (Hex:31H, 32H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48) is converted to 3 bytes of data. Information region is also included in the use capacity. Do not use this function at the same time as the NV bit image (FS q) command. See the Note for <Function 48> for a detailed explanation of the sending process. [Reference] FS q, GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 48> 3-79

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 64> [Name] Send defined NC graphics key code list [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn d1 d2 Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C 04 00 30 40 4B 43 Decimal 29 40 76 4 0 48 64 75 67 [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C 04 00 00 00 30 40 4B 43 Decimal 29 56 76 4 0 0 0 48 64 75 67 [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + ph 256 = 4 (pl = 4, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 4 (p1 = 4, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 64 d1 = 75, d2 = 67 Slip : pl + ph 256 = 4 (pl = 4, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 4 (p1 = 4, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 64 d1 = 75, d2 = 67 ation : pl + ph 256 = 4 (pl = 4, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 4 (p1 = 4, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 64 d1 = 75, d2 = 67 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sends the defined NC graphics key code list. [Details] Sends the key code in the following format. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 72H 114 1Byte Identifier *1, 2 40H/41H 64/65 1Byte Data *3 30H to 39H 48 to 57 2 to 80Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte *1 Send one block with identification information (3rd byte) as 40Hex, when the defined NV graphcis data count is less than 40. *2 Send one block with identification information (3rd byte) as 41Hex, when the defined NV graphcis data count is over 40. If there is no defined NC graphics key code list, it sends the following format. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 72H 114 1Byte Identifier information 40H 64 1Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte Do not use this function at the same time as the NV bit image (FS q) command. NV bit images defined by FS q are determined to have no data. See the Note for <Function 48> for a detailed explanation of the sending process. [Reference] FS q, GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 48> 3-80

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 65> [Name] Batch delete all NV graphics data [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn d1 d2 d3 Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C 05 00 30 41 43 4C 52 Decimal 29 40 76 5 0 48 65 67 76 82 [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 d3 Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C 05 00 00 00 30 41 43 4C 52 Decimal 29 56 76 5 0 0 0 48 65 67 76 82 [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + ph 256 = 5 (pl = 5, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 5 (p1 = 5, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 65 d1 = 67, d2 = 76, d3 = 82 Slip : pl + ph 256 = 5 (pl = 5, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 5 (p1 = 5, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 65 d1 = 67, d2 = 76, d3 = 82 ation : pl + ph 256 = 5 (pl = 5, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 5 (p1 = 5, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 65 d1 = 67, d2 = 76, d3 = 82 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Batch deletes all definition data of the NV graphics defined by Function 67. Deleted region becomes an unused region. All key codes become undefined. [Details] only at the top of the line in standard mode. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Do not use this function when defining a macro because it is not compatible with macros. All NV graphics data is erased by executing this function, so be careful when using NV graphics data with multiple applications. NV graphics data defined by FS q are erased. [Reference] GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 67> 3-81

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 66> [Name] Delete specified NV graphics data [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn kc1 kc2 Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C 04 00 30 42 kc1 kc2 Decimal 29 40 76 4 0 48 66 kc1 kc2 [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C 04 00 00 00 30 42 kc1 kc2 Decimal 29 56 76 4 0 0 0 48 66 kc1 kc2 [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + ph 256 = 4 (pl = 4, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 4 (p1 = 4, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 66 32 kc1 126 32 kc2 126 Slip : pl + ph 256 = 4 (pl = 4, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 4 (p1 = 4, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 66 32 kc1 126 32 kc2 126 ation : pl + ph 256 = 4 (pl = 4, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 4 (p1 = 4, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 66 32 kc1 126 32 kc2 126 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Delete NV graphics data defined by a key code (kc1, kc2). Deleted region becomes an unused region. Deleted key codes become undefined. [Details] only at the top of the line in standard mode. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Do not use this function when defining a macro because it is not compatible with macros. [Reference] GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 67> 3-82

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 67> [Name] Define NV graphics data (Raster format) [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn a kc1 kc2 b xl xh yl yh [c d1... dk]1... [c d1... dk]b Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C pl ph 30 43 30 kc1 kc2 b xl xh yl yh [c d1... dk]1... [c d1... dk]b Decimal 29 40 76 pl ph 48 67 48 kc1 kc2 b xl xh yl yh [c d1... dk]1... [c d1... dk]b [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a kc1 kc2 b xl xh yl yh [c d1... dk]1... [c d1... dk]b Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 30 43 30 kc1 kc2 b xl xh yl yh [c d1... dk]1... [c d1... dk]b Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 48 67 48 kc1 kc2 b xl xh yl yh [c d1... dk]1... [c d1... dk]b [Defined Area] Thermal : 12 pl + ph 256 65535 (0 pl 255, 0 ph 255) 12 p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 4294967295 m = 48, fn = 67, a = 48 32 kc1 126, 32 kc2 126 b = 1, 2 1 xl + xh 256 8192 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 32) 1 yl + yh 256 2304 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 9) c = 49 (Single-color mode), c = 49, 50 (2-color mode) 0 d 255 k = (((xl + xh 256) + 7) 8) (yl + yh 256) Slip : 12 pl + ph 256 65535 (0 pl 255, 0 ph 255) 12 p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 4294967295 m = 48, fn = 67, a = 48 32 kc1 126, 32 kc2 126 b = 1, 2 1 xl + xh 256 8192 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 32) 1 yl + yh 256 2304 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 9) c = 49 (Single-color mode), c = 49, 50 (2-color mode) 0 d 255 k = (((xl + xh 256) + 7 ) 8 ) (yl + yh 256) ation : 12 pl + ph 256 65535 (0 pl 255, 0 ph 255) 12 p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 4294967295 m = 48, fn = 67, a = 48 32 kc1 126, 32 kc2 126 b = 1, 2 1 xl + xh 256 8192 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 32) 1 yl + yh 256 2304 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 9) c = 49 (Single-color mode), c = 49, 50 (2-color mode) 0 d 255 k = (((xl + xh 256) + 7 ) 8 ) (yl + yh 256) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Defines NV graphics data (raster format) defined by a key code (kc1, kc2). b specifies the number of colors of the defined data. xl and xh specify the horizontal direction size of the defined data in (xl + xh 256) dots. yl and yh specify the vertical direction size of the defined data in (yl + yh 256) dots. c specifies the color of the defined data. c = 49: Black c = 50: Red d specifies the defined data (raster format). Data is overwritten if the specified key code already exists in the memory. 3-83

[Details] NV graphics are image data defined in the non-volatile memory of the printer. Data definitions for NV graphics data generated by using this command are valid until redefined by this command. This command is used to define NV graphics data. This function is defined by the raster format. only at the top of the line in standard mode. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Do not use this function when defining a macro because it is not compatible with macros. If there is not an adequate amount of space to store the NV graphics data, this function cannot be use. Use Function 51 to check the available space that can be used. As one option, you can delete NV graphics data defined in the same key code. k byte data d1 dk are processed as one item of the defined NV graphics data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0. When single-color (b=1) is selected, this is defined as one data group [c d1 dk]. When 2-color (b=2) is selected, this is defined as two data groups [c d1 dk]. When a color (c) is specified, it is important to specify a color different from the data group. At that time, the vertical and horizontal sizes of the data are the same. NV graphics data is printed using Function 69. Be aware that this command and NV bit image data (FS q) cannot both be defined at the same time. The NV bit image data definition (FS q) is erased by using this command. The relationship of NV graphics data (raster format) and printing results are shown below. When xl + xh 256 = 512 (xl+xhx256) 8dot = 64 bytes 1 2 3 63 64 65 66 67 127 128 (yl + yh x 256) dot k-1 k 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSB LSB Note When the specification of (xl + xh 256), and (yl + yh 256) exceed the remaining capacity of the NV graphics region, this function does not operate. When processing this function when the NV bit image is defined using FS q, after all NV bit images are deleted, define data using this function. It is possible to print NV graphics defined with this function to all sheets. [Reference] GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 51>, <Function 69>, FS q 3-84

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 69> [Name] Print specified NV graphics data [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn kc1 kc2 x y Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C 06 00 30 45 kc1 kc2 x y Decimal 29 40 76 6 0 48 69 kc1 kc2 x y [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 x y Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C 06 00 00 00 30 45 kc1 kc2 x y Decimal 29 56 76 6 0 0 0 48 69 kc1 kc2 x y [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + ph 256 = 6 (pl = 6, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 6 (p1 = 6, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48, fn = 69 32 kc1 126, 32 kc2 126 x = 1, 2, y = 1, 2 Slip : pl + ph 256 = 6 (pl = 6, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 6 (p1 = 6, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48, fn = 69 32 kc1 126, 32 kc2 126 x = 1, 2, y = 1 (Standard mode) x = 2, y = 1 (Page mode) x = 1, 2, y = 1 (Double-density page mode) ation : pl + ph 256 = 6 (pl = 6, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 6 (p1 = 6, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48, fn = 69 32 kc1 126, 32 kc2 126 x = 1, 2, y = 1 (Standard mode) x = 2, y = 1 (Page mode) x = 1, 2, y = 1 (Double-density page mode) [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Prints NV graphics data defined by a key code (kc1, kc2). Prints selected data (horizontal x mag. x vertical y mag.) [Details] This command is used to print NV graphics data defined by Function 67. The printer prints only when the NV graphics data that matches the specified key code are defined. If the data of the specified key code does not exist, the portion of the counter data is received and discarded. When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when there is data in the print buffer. If there is data in the printer buffer, the portion of the counter data is received and discarded. When in page mode, data is only expanded to the print buffer, but printing is not executed. If a size of graphics is specified that exceeds the print region, data in the print region is targeted, but the excess portion is not printed. The vertical and horizontal sizes of the NV graphics is specified by x and y. 90º and 270º rotated printing in page mode applies the print region of x: paper feed direction and y: perpendicular direction to paper feed direction and the dot density. Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted printing, and 90 right rotation) are unaffected. Regardless of the line feed amount set by the initial line feed amount setting (ESC 2) and line feed amount setting (ESC 3), paper feeds are executed for the number of dots (NV graphics n height) when normal mode and horizontal magnified mode are specified, and for the number of dots (NV graphics n height x 2) when vertical high mode and double-high, double-wide mode are specified. After printing the graphic, the top of the line is set at the next printing position (the printer status is top of line and no print data ) and the printer executes normal data processing. When printing NV graphics, and printing in one direction is selected by ESC U, it is possible to print with the top and bottom aligned. This command is affected by the following command settings. Position alignment (ESC a n) Absolute position movement (ESC $ n1 n2) Relative position movement (ESC \ n1 n2) 3-85

[STAR] <Thermal> X x Y Print region setting (ESC RS A n) Horizontal tab (HT) Upside-down printing (ESC { n) Note It is possible to print NV graphics defined with this function to all sheets. Print Mode The DPI and maximum print region are shown below. The perpendicular direction indicates the paper feed direction. Horizontal direction indicates a perpendicular direction with regard to the paper feed direction. The maximum print region of the perpendicular direction is applied to the graphics printing in page mode. In page mode select ESC L, and in double-density page mode, select FS L. See Appendix 5 for details on the NV graphics expansion position in page mode. Hor. Dir. Dot Density Max. Printing Region Vert. Dir. Dot Density Max. Print Region (2-color) Max. Print Region (Singlecolor) 1 x 1 Normal mode 180 DPI 512 dots 180 DPI 415 dots 831 dots 1 x 2 Double-wide Mode 90 DPI 256 dots 180 DPI 415 dots 831 dots 2 x 1 Double-high Mode 180 DPI 512 dots 90 DPI 207 dots 415 dots 2 x 2 Double-high, Doublewide Mode 90 DPI 256 dots 90 DPI 207 dots 415 dots The maximum print region of the vertical direction in page mode Dot density of STAR printers (STAR printer head: 203 DPI) X x Y Mode Horizontal Direction Dot Density Vertical Direction Dot Density 1 x 1 Normal mode 203 DPI 203 DPI 1 x 2 Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 203 DPI 2 x 1 Double-high Mode 203 DPI 101 DPI 2 x 2 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 101 DPI <Slip>, <ation> Standard Mode X x Y Print Mode Hor. Dir. Max. Vert. Dir. Dot Density Printing Region Dot Density 1 x 1 Normal mode 160 DPI 540 dots 72 DPI 1 x 2 Double-wide Mode 80 DPI 270 dots 72 DPI 2 x 1 Double-high Mode 160 DPI 540 dots 144 DPI 2 x 2 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 80 DPI 270 dots 144 DPI When the print starting position setting is upper left or lower right X x Y Print Mode Hor. Dir. Dot Density Maximum Print Region Page Mode Double-density Page Mode Vert. Dir. Dot Density Maximum Print Region Page Mode Double-density Page mode 1 x 1 Normal mode 160 DPI - 540 dots 72 DPI 704 dots 352 dots 1 x 2 Double-wide Mode 80 DPI 270 dots 270 dots - - - When the print starting position setting is upper right or lower left Maximum Print Region Maximum Print Region X x Y Print Mode Hor. Dir. Page Double-density Vert. Dir. Page Double-density Dot Density Mode Page Mode Dot Density Mode Page mode 1 x 1 Normal mode 80 DPI 270 dots 270 dots 144 DPI - 704 dots 1 x 2 Double-wide Mode 160 DPI - - 72 DPI 704 dots 352 dots [Reference] GS ( L/GS 8 L, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC a, ESC $, ESC \, ESC RS A, HT, ESC { 3-86

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 50> [Name] Print graphics data stored in the buffer [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C 02 00 30 fn Decimal 29 40 76 2 0 48 fn [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C 02 00 00 00 30 fn Decimal 29 56 76 2 0 0 0 48 fn [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + ph 256 = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 = 2 (p1 = 2, p2 = p3 = p4 = 0) m = 48 fn = 2, 50 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-87

(1) GS ( L, (2) GS 8 L <Function 112> [Name] Store graphics data in print buffer (Raster format) [Code] (1) ASCII GS ( L pl ph m fn a bx by c xl xh yl yh d1... dk Hexadecimal 1D 28 4C pl ph 30 70 30 bx by c xl xh yl yh d1... dk Decimal 29 40 76 pl ph 48 112 48 bx by c xl xh yl yh d1... dk [Code] (2) ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a bx by c xl xh yl yh d1... dk Hexadecimal 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 30 70 30 bx by c xl xh yl yh d1... dk Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 48 112 48 bx by c xl xh yl yh d1... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : 11 pl + ph 256 65535 (0 pl 255, 0 ph 255) 11 p1 + p2 256 + p3 65536 + p4 16777216 4294967295 m = 48, fn = 112, a = 48 0 d 255 k = (((xl + xh 256) + 7) 8) (yl + yh 256) bx = 1, 2, by = 1, 2 c = 49 (Single-color) 1 xl + xh 256 1024 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 4) 1 yl + yh 256 1662 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 6) c = 49 (2-color) 1 xl + xh 256 1024 (0 xl 255, 0 xh 4) 1 yl + yh 256 1662 (0 yl 255, 0 yh 3) ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Stores graphics data in print buffer using raster format. As Star specifications thereafter, executes a process equivalent to GS ( L <Function 50> (prints graphics data stored in the print buffer) that is conventional provided. Specifies size using horizontal bx mag. x vertical by mag. c specifies the color of the stored data. c = 49: Black xl and xh specify the horizontal direction size of the stored data in (xl + xh 256) dots. yl and yh specify the vertical direction size of the stored data in (yl + yh 256) dots. d specifies the stored data (raster format). 3-88

[Details] This function is used to store NV graphics data directly to the print buffer. When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when the current position is at the top of the line and there is data in the print buffer. If there is data in the printer buffer, the portion of the counter data is received and discarded. This command must not be used when defining a macro. This command cannot define to macros. When this command is processed during macro definition, the macro definition is canceled and processing of this command is started. The macro remains undefined. If a size of bit image is specified that exceeds the print region, data in the print region is targeted, but the excess portion is not printed. The vertical and horizontal sizes of the raster graphics are specified by bx, and by. 90º and 270º rotated printing in page mode applies the print region of width: paper feed direction and height: perpendicular direction to paper feed direction and the dot density. Raster graphics are unaffected by the settings of emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted printing, upside-down printing and 90 right rotation. k byte data d1 dk are processed as raster bit image data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0. When using this command, real time commands cannot be used. The relationship of NV graphics data (raster format) and printing results are shown below. When xl + xh 256 = 512 (xl+xhx256) 8 dot = 64 bytes 1 2 3 63 64 65 66 67 127 128 (yl + yh x 256) dot k-1 k 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSB LSB Note This function is valid only when thermal is selected as the active sheet. When slip, or validation is selected, the portion of the counter data is received and discarded. See Function 69 for details on DPI and maximum print region using this function because it is the same. See Appendix 5 for details on the expansion position of raster graphics in page mode. [Reference] GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 50>, <Function 69> 3-89

3-3-9) Status Related Commands DLE EOT n [Name] Real-time status transmission [Code] ASCII DLE EOT n Hexadecimal 10 04 n Decimal 16 4 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 6 Slip : 1 n 6 ation : 1 n 6 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sends status specified by n in real-time. n Function 1 Sends printer status 2 Sends offline cause status 3 Sends error cause status 4 Sends thermal status 5 Sends slip status 6 Sends validation status [Details] Each status indicates the current status. Each status is 1 byte of data. Sends status without confirming the reception status of the host. Executes even when offline, reception buffer full or in errors. This is a real-time command that processes during reception. This command is not executed while the printer is BUSY. In the DIP switch settings, if the BUSY condition: reception buffer full, offline/reception buffer is full the printer will not be BUSY for offline status and error status. If the ASB is valid by enabling/disabling automatic status (GS a), it is necessary to identify the status and the ASB status using this command. See Appendix 2 for details on an identification method. This command is ignored even if the printer specification using select peripheral device (ESC =) is invalid. See Appendix 2 for status details. This command is effective only on models whose interface supports bi-directional data communications. This command is invalid when the block data [header to NUL] is sent. See Appendix 2 for parameter status details. Note Other than this command, when a data string of <10>H <04>H <n> (1 n 4) is received, operations that are the same as this command are used so the user must be careful. Ex.: In ESC * m nl nh [d1..dk], d1 = <10>H, d2 = <04>H, d3 = <01>H [Reference] DLE ENQ, GS a, GS r, Appendix 2 3-90

DLE EOT 0 1 [Name] Real-time status transmission [Code] ASCII DLE EOT 0 1 Hexadecimal 10 04 0 1 Decimal 16 4 0 1 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sends cut paper status in real-time. [Details] Status indicates the current status. Status is 1 byte of data. Sends status without confirming the reception status of the host. Executes even when offline, reception buffer full or in errors. This is a real-time command that processes during reception. This command is not executed while the printer is BUSY. In the DIP switch settings, if the BUSY condition: reception buffer full, offline/reception buffer is full the printer will not be BUSY for offline status and error status. If the ASB is valid by enabling/disabling automatic status (GS a), it is necessary to identify the status and the ASB status using this command. See Appendix 2 for details on an identification method. This command is ignored even if the printer specification using select peripheral device (ESC =) is invalid. See Appendix 2 for status details. This command is effective only on models whose interface supports bi-directional data communications. This command is invalid when the block data [header to NUL] is sent. See Appendix 2 for parameter status details. Note Other than this command, when a data string of <10>H <04>H <0> <1> is received, operations that are the same as this command are used so the user must be careful. Ex.: In ESC * m nl nh [d1..dk], d1 = <10>H, d2 = <04>H, d3 = <00>H, d4 = <01>H [Reference] DLE ENQ, GS a, GS r, Appendix 2 3-91

GS a n [Name] Enable/disable transmission of automatic status [Code] ASCII GS a n Hexadecimal 1D 61 n Decimal 29 97 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : When DIP-SW set auto status function to invalid : n = 0 When DIP-SW set auto status function to valid : n = 2 Slip : When DIP-SW set auto status function to invalid : n = 0 When DIP-SW set auto status function to valid : n = 2 ation : When DIP-SW set auto status function to invalid : n = 0 When DIP-SW set auto status function to valid : n = 2 [Function] Selects states targeted for ASB (Automatic Status Back). Bit States Targeted by ASB 0 1 7 Undefined - - 6 Panel switch status Invalid 5 Cut paper status Invalid 4 Undefined - - 3 Continuous paper detector Invalid 2 Error status Invalid 1 Online/Offline status Invalid 0 Drawer kick connector #3 pin status Invalid [Details] The ASB function automatically sends the cover open/closed status and offline/online status from the printer. This is called the ASB function and that information is called the ASB status. When using ASB, the application notifies in real-time when the printer s status changes. This command enables multiple basic ASB states (excluding n = 0). Also, when this command is executed, the current ASB status is sent from the printer. During the time the ASB valid, the selected basic ASB contents are sent when they change. When n = 0, the basic ASB function is invalid. While ASB is invalid, the basic ASB status is not sent. Multiple statuses can be targeted for ASB. Even when the ASB function is valid and the printer is invalid because of ESC =, the basic ASB is sent when the printer status changes. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. When the status changes, the entire content of the basic ASB status constantly is reflected in the transmission. Therefore, each status shows the current status, so it is possible to change states even for states that are not valid for ASB (automatic status back). It is possible customize the basic ASB status bit using GS ( B. This command is effective only on models whose interface supports bi-directional data communications. This is fixed to n = 255 in an Ethernet interface and this command is ignored. In default, if the ASB function is valid, it can send the status the first time after the power is turned off. Sends the following 4-bytes of status without confirming whether the host is read for reception. The 4-bytes of status always follow excluding the Xoff code. This command is executed when the reception buffer is expanded, so it I possible to generate a delay between command reception and status transmission according to the reception buffer status. When using status real-time transmission (DLE EOT), printer ID transmission (GS I), and status transmission (GS r), it is necessary to identify the status and the ASB status using these commands. See Appendix 2 for status details. ASB is temporarily invalid while sending block data [header to NUL]. Therefore, while sending block data [header to NUL], it is not possible to get the printer status using ASB. 3-92

When using a serial interface, 4-bytes of status are sent without checking whether the host PC is prepared for reception. For a parallel interface, when using the ASB function, it is preferred that the host PC be in a reverse-idle state. However, if it is difficult for the host PC to always be in reverse idle state, it is necessary to periodically enter reverse mode to get the ASB status. If the host PC has not entered reverse mode for a long period of time, the printer status has changed during that time and it is necessary to store the ASB status, it is necessary to send two sets of 8-bytes (applying a log status before the current status data) of ASB status changed to the following special data when the host PC has entered reverse mode. ASB-1 : Status indicating whether a status has changed. ASB-2 : Latest ASB status When there are bits of different values between ASB-1 and ASB-2, a status changes has occurred at least one time. The following is an example. First Byte Second Byte Third Byte Fourth Byte ASB-1 0011 1000 0000 0000 0110 0011 0000 1111 ASB-2 0001 0000 0000 0000 0110 0011 0000 1111 Bits 5 and 3 are different for the first byte. This information indicates that the printer went from offline (bit 3) because the cover was open (bit 5) to currently online with the cover closed. It is possible for the host PC to differentiate with the other transmission data and standard ASB status using the information of bits 0, 1, 4 and 7. When 0xx1xx00 (x = 0 or 1) is sent from the printer, thereafter 3-bytes of data are processed as ASB status. The following shows an exception when specifying an item of ASB status. When the printer is using Xon/Xoff mode, there is the possibility that the Xoff code can interrupt between the 4-bytes of ASB status. Therefore, data from the printer is processed by 4 bytes, excluding the Xoff code. The configuration of ASB status is different to the Xoff code. Note Third byte of standard status (paper detector information) Bits 1 and 3 can be customized by GS ( B. Bit 1: Cut paper waiting status Bit 3: Cut paper removal waiting status Fourth byte of standard status (paper detector information) Bits 6 can be customized by GS ( B. Bit 6: Discharge paper detector status [Reference] GS ( B, DLE EOT, GS I, GS r, Appendix 2 3-93

GS ( B pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] [Name] Bit-customize ASB status [Code] ASCII GS ( B pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] Hexadecimal 1D 28 42 pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] Decimal 29 40 66 pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] [Defined Area] Thermal : pl = 2, 3, 5 ph = 0 m = 97 When a = 49, b = 44, when a = 51, b = 45 Slip : pl = 2, 3, 5 ph = 0 m = 97 When a = 49, b = 44, when a = 51, b = 45 ation : pl = 2, 3, 5 ph = 0 m = 97 When a = 49, b = 44, when a = 51, b = 45 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Changes the bit assignment of the basic ASB status that sends status by specifying GS a. pl, ph are (m, [a1 b1]... [ak bk]) that specify the parameter count after m in (pl + ph 256) bytes. When a = 0, the customize settings are canceled. When a 0, initialize the bits of the ASB status to customize (b is unnecessary). Specify which bytes of the ASB status using bits 7, 6, 5, or 4, and specify the bit position using bits 3, 2, 1 or 0. b specifies the ASB status. The specification of a and b when customizing are as shown below. a b Conventional Models Changed Functions 31H 44 Roll paper near end detector Cut paper insertion waiting status 33H 45 Roll paper end detector Cut paper removal waiting status [Details] This command customizes the status bits and does not change the valid/invalid setting of the basic ASB status transmission. Changing the bits using this command and the basic ASB status automatic transmission is invalid temporarily using the GS a command. Customizing bits using this command does not affect the basic ASB status of GS a. Refer to GS a for details. Customizing is not specified in default. The setting of this command is valid until the printer is reset, or the power is cut. The command is not initialized by ESC @. [Reference] GS a, ESC @ 3-94

FS ( e pl ph m n [Name] ate/invalidate expanded ASB transmission [Code] ASCII FS ( e pl ph m n Hexadecimal 1C 28 65 pl ph m n Decimal 28 40 101 pl ph m n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl = 2, ph = 0 (pl + ph 256 = 2) m = 51 0 n 255 Slip : pl = 2, ph = 0 (pl + ph 256 = 2) m = 51 0 n 255 ation : pl = 2, ph = 0 (pl + ph 256 = 2) m = 51 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Sets the expanded ASB (Automatic Status Back) to valid/invalid, and specifies items included in the status using the n value. Bit Function 0 1 7 Undefined - - 6 Undefined - - 5 Undefined - - 4 Undefined - - 3 Undefined - - 2 Undefined - - 1 Undefined - - 0 MICR status Invalid [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. The ASB (Automatic Status Back) automatically sends information of whether the MICR is selected in realtime to the printer. This is called the ASB function and that information is called the ASB status. When using ASB, the application notifies in real-time when the printer s status changes. This command enables expanded ASB status (excluding n = 0). Also, when this command is executed, the current expanded ASB status is sent from the printer. During the time the ASB valid, the selected expanded ASB contents are sent when they change. When n = 0, the expanded ASB function is invalid. While ASB is invalid, the expanded ASB status is not sent. Even when the ASB function is valid and the printer is invalid because of ESC =, the expanded ASB is sent when the printer status changes. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. When the status changes, the entire content of the expanded ASB status constantly is reflected in the transmission. Therefore, each status shows the current status, so it is possible to change states even for states that are not valid for ASB (automatic status back). The expanded ASB status is the following 4-bytes of data. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 39H 57 1Byte Status A (*1) 40H to 41H 64 to 65 1Byte Status B 40H 64 1Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte 3-95

*1: The following shows status A. Bit Function 0 1 7 Fixed at 0 - - 6 Fixed at 1 - - 5 Undefined - - 4 Undefined - - 3 Undefined - - 2 Undefined - - 1 Undefined - - 0 MICR status bit (Check paper selected) (Active sheet) Invalid (Not an active sheet) When waiting the insertion of the check paper using FS a 0, the status of 0 for bit 0 is sent. After MICR reading ends, and the printer idles after feeding the check paper to the print starting position using FS a 1, the status of 1 for bit 0 is sent. ASB status is not transmitted while sending block data [header to NUL]. Therefore, while sending block data [header to NUL], it is not possible to get the printer status using ASB. When using a serial interface, 4-bytes of status are sent without checking whether the host PC is prepared for reception. When in Xon/Xoff mode of the serial interface, there is the possibility that the Xoff code can interrupt between the 4-bytes of ASB status. For a parallel interface, when using the ASB function, it is preferred that the host PC be in a reverse-idle state. However, if it is difficult for the host PC to always be in reverse idle state, it is necessary to periodically enter reverse mode to get the ASB status. If the host PC has not entered reverse mode for a long period of time, the printer status has changed during that time and it is necessary to store the ASB status, it is necessary to send two sets of 8-bytes (applying a log status before the current status data) of ASB status changed to the following special data when the host PC has entered reverse mode. ASB-1 : Status indicating whether a status has changed. ASB-2 : Latest ASB status When there are bits of different values between ASB-1 and ASB-2, a status changes has occurred at least one time. The following is an example. Header Status A Status B NUL ASB-1 0011 1001 0100 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 ASB-2 0011 1001 0100 0001 0100 0000 0000 0000 Bit 0 of status A is different. This information selects MICR at least one time, and indicates that currently, MICR has not been selected. Specific data of the transmission data block can be used to differentiate between other transmission blocks and the expanded ASB status. When the header (Hex = 39H/Decimal = 57) is sent from the printer, data up to NUL (Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0) is processed as expanded ASB status. Note Expanded ASB status (status A) only on models equipped with MICR. [Reference] FS a 0, FS a 1 3-96

GS r n [Name] Transmission of status [Code] ASCII GS r n Hexadecimal 1D 72 n Decimal 29 114 n [Defined Area] Thermal : n = 1, 2, 3, 49, 50, 51, 80 Slip : n = 1, 2, 3, 49, 50, 51, 80 ation : n = 1, 2, 3, 49, 50, 51, 80 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sends the specified status n Function 1, 49 Transmission of paper detector status 2, 50 Transmission of drawer kick connector status 3, 51 Transmission of 1 byte of cut paper status 80 Transmission of 1 byte of cut paper dot status [Details] When 1 n 3, or 49 n 51, transmits 1 byte of status data. When n = 80, transmits character string data composed of [header to NUL]. The following shows transmitted status. Detector Status (n = 1, 49) Bit Status 0 1 7 Fixed at 0 - - 6 BOF detector Paper Paper out 5 COF detector Paper Paper out 4 Fixed at 0 - - 3 Roll paper end detector Paper Paper out 2 Roll paper end detector Paper Paper out 1 Roll paper near end detector Paper Paper out 0 Roll paper near end detector Paper Paper out Drawer kick connector status (n = 2, 50) Bit Status 0 1 7 Fixed at 0 - - 6 Undefined - - 5 Undefined - - 4 Fixed at 0 - - 3 Undefined - - 2 Undefined - - 1 Undefined - - 0 Drawer kick connector #3 pin status L H 3-97

Cut paper status (n = 3, 51) Status (Hex) Remaining Dot Remaining Dot Status (Hex) Count Count 00 0 to 8 08 72 to 80 01 9 to 17 09 81 to 89 02 18 to 26 0A 90 to 98 03 27 to 35 0B 99 to 107 04 36 to 44 0C 108 to 116 05 45 to 53 0D 117 to 125 06 54 to 62 0E 126 to 134 07 63 to 71 0F Min. 135 Paper status Status (Hex) Paper status 00 There is no paper at the head position, or paper feed is not possible. 01 to 07 Paper cannot feed in reverse. 08 It is possible that paper cannot feed in reverse. 09 to 0F Paper can feed in reverse. Cut paper dot count status (n = 80) Transmits as character string data composed of [header to NUL]. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 2BH 43 1Byte Dot Count 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 4Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte The decimal value indicating the dot count is converted to character data and sent in order from the MSB. When the dot count is 120, 120 is converted to 3 bytes of data (Hex:31H, 32H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48). When cut paper is not selected, or when printing is not possible, the printer sends status of dot count 0 (4-byte character string). When cut paper is selected, and counting of the remaining print region has not started (paper is not sent until the print starting position), 9999 status (7-bytes of character string) is sent for the dot count. Status (Hex) Paper status 0 There is no paper at the head position, or paper feed is not possible. 1 to 121 Paper cannot feed in reverse. 122 to 334 It is possible that paper cannot feed in reverse. 9999 Paper can reverse feed: Remaining print region has not started being counted (BOF detector indicates there is paper.) When using this command, observe the following rules. When the host PC sends this command, the printer sends response data or the status to the PC. The PC does not send any more data until it receives response data or status from the printer. When using a serial interface, configure operations for the host PC to use the printer only while the printer is in the READY state. When using a parallel interface, data sent by this function is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer of the printer in the same way as other data (excluding ASB). When the host PC enters reverse mode, data is sent from the top of the transmission buffer in order. When the amount of data exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer, data is erased. When using this command, the host PC enters should enter the reverse mode immediately to transmit the status. When using the Xon/Xoff mode communications of the serial interface, it is possible to use Xoff in a data string of [header to NUL]. Information of bits 4 and 7 can be used to identify the transmission status and standard status (excluding the paper cut dot count status). Immediately after sending the GS r command, when 0xx0xxxx (x = 0 or 1) is sent from the printer, the host handles that as a standard status. The status of the number of dots in the remaining print region can be identified as other transmission data by specific data (identifier) of the transmission data string. When the header sent by the printer is [Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55], data up to NUL 3-98

[Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0] is handled as one group, and identified by corresponding to the combination of the header and identifier. If the ASB is valid by enabling/disabling automatic status (GS a), it is necessary to identify the status and the ASB status using this command. See Appendix 2 for details on an identification method. Note Paper Detector Status (n = 1, 49) When the roll paper end detector detects paper is out, the printer stops printing and always goes offline. Therefore, this command is not sent for the status where the status bits 2 or 3 for paper out shows no paper. [Reference] GS a, Appendix 2 3-99

3-3-10) Bar Code Related Commands GS H n [Name] Select HRI character print position [Code] ASCII GS H n Hexadecimal 1D 48 n Decimal 29 72 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 3, 48 n 51 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Selects the printing position of HRI (Human Readable Interpretation) characters for bar code printing. n Printing Position 0, 48 Do not print 1, 49 Above bar code 2, 50 Below bar code 3, 51 Above and below bar code (both sides) [Details] HRI characters are printed with the font selected by the selection (GS f) of the font for HRI characters. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. The HRI characters show the content of the bar code and are printed together with the bar code. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS f, GS k, ESC @ 3-100

GS f n [Name] Select HRI character font [Code] ASCII GS f n Hexadecimal 1D 66 n Decimal 29 102 n [Defined Area] Thermal : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Selects the font of HRI (Human Readable Interpretation) characters for bar code printing. n Function (Thermal) 0, 48 Selects font-a (12 x 24) 1, 49 Selects font-b (9 x 17) [Details] [STAR] The font selection using this command affects only HRI characters. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. HRI characters are printed at the position specified by the selection (GS H) of the HRI character printing position. The HRI characters show the content of the bar code and are printed together with the bar code. The following shows the HRI character font configuration for STAR printers. Character Fonts Thermal (Horizontal x Vertical) Font-A 12 x 24 Dots Font-B 9 x 24 Dots <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS H, GS k, ESC @ 3-101

GS h n [Name] Set bar code height [Code] ASCII GS h n Hexadecimal 1D 68 n Decimal 29 104 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 162 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets the height of the bar code to n dots. [Details] This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Note Settings are in 1 dot units. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS k, ESC @ 3-102

(1) GS k m d1...dk NUL, (2) GS k m n d1...dk [Name] Print bar code [Code] (1) ASCII GS k m d1... dk NUL Hexadecimal 1D 6B m d1... dk 00 Decimal 29 107 m d1... dk 0 (2) ASCII GS k m n d1... dk Hexadecimal 1D 6B m n d1... dk Decimal 29 107 m n d1... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : (1) 0 m 6 Defined area of k and d is different depending on the bar code type. (2) 65 m 73 Defined area of n and d is different depending on the bar code type. ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Selects bar code type and prints bar code. For (1) m Bar Code Type Defined area Defined area of d of k 0 UPC-A 11 k 12 0 to 9 (48 d 57) 1 UPC-E 11 k 12 0 to 9 (48 d 57) (d1 = 48) 2 JAN13/EAN13 12 k 13 0 to 9 (48 d 57) 3 JAN8/EAN8 7 k 8 0 to 9 (48 d 57) 4 CODE39 1 k 0 to 9 (48 d 57), A to Z (65 d 90), <SP>, $, %, *, +, -,., / (32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47) 5 ITF 2 k (However, 0 to 9 (48 d 57) it is an even number.) 6 CODABAR (NW-7 ) 1 k 0 to 9 (48 d 57), A to D (65 d 68), $, +, -,., /, : (36, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58) k indicates the bar code data. d specifies bar code character code data to print. For (2) m Bar Code Type Defined area Defined area of d of n 65 UPC-A 11 n 12 0 to 9 (48 d 57) 66 UPC-E 11 n 12 0 to 9 (48 d 57) (d1 = 48) 67 JAN13/EAN13 12 n 13 0 to 9 (48 d 57) 68 JAN8/EAN8 7 n 8 0 to 9 (48 d 57) 69 CODE39 1 n 255 0 to 9 (48 d 57), A to Z (65 d 90), <SP>, $, %, *, +, -,., / (32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45, 46, 47) 70 ITF 2 n 255 0 to 9 (48 d 57) 71 CODABAR (NW-7 ) (even number) 1 n 255 0 to 9 (48 d 57), A to D (65 d 68), $, +, -,., /, : (36, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58) 72 CODE93 1 n 255 0 d 127 73 CODE128 2 n 255 0 d 127 n indicates the bar code data byte count. d specifies bar code character code data to print. 3-103

[Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when the current position is at the top of the line and there is data in the print buffer. If there is data, 2 bytes are ignored (data after m is processed as normal data). When standard mode is select, and d is outside of the definition area, only paper is fed, and subsequent data is processed as normal data. When page mode is select, and d is outside of the definition area, the command is terminated, and subsequent data is processed as normal data. The data expansion starting position does not move. When in page mode, data is only expanded to the print buffer, but printing is not executed. After the bar code expansion is ended, the next dot of the final data of the bar code is the next data expansion starting position. When standard mode is selected, and the horizontal width of the bar code exceeds one line of the print region, the bar code is not printed and only a paper feed is executed. Performs a line feed for the height of the bar code (including the HRI characters when HRI character printing is specified) regardless of the line feed amount set by the initial line feed amount setting (ESC 2) and line feed amount setting (ESC 3). Printing bar codes (including HRI), excluding upside-down printing (emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted printing, and 90 right rotation) are unaffected. Bar code printing is affected by the following command settings. Position alignment (ESC a n) Absolute position movement (ESC $ n1 n2) Relative position movement (ESC \ n1 n2) Print region setting (ESC RS A n) Horizontal tab (HT) Upside-down printing (ESC { n}) When in 2-color print mode, the bar code is printed with the selected color. After printing this bar code, the top of the line is set at the next printing position (the printer status is top of line and no print data ) and the printer executes normal data processing. With specifications for (1) 0 m 6 and (2) 65 m 71, the same bar code type is selected, and the print results are the same. When 0 m 6, this command ends with a NUL code. When ITF (m = 5), if the data count is odd, the final one byte is ignored. When 65 m 71, processes with the n bytes of bar code data after n. The command is not set for the quiet zone (left and right margins). When using this command, always consider the quiet zone. UPC-A (m = 0, 65) Module check character (1 byte) is processed as shown below. When the processed bar code data count is 11 bytes, the module check character is automatically added. When the processed bar code data count is 12 bytes, the 12 th byte of data is ignored, and the module check character is automatically added. Left, center and right guard cars are automatically added. (1) Spec.: When 12 bytes of bar code data are processed, the command ends and subsequent data is handled as normal data. (2) Spec.: When n 11, 12, the command is canceled and subsequent data is handled as normal data. UPC-E (m = 1, 66) Data of the 1 st byte (d1) is processed as a system character (NSC), so always specify 0 (30H). Module check character (1 byte) is processed as shown below. When the processed bar code data count is 11 bytes, the module check character is automatically added. When the processed bar code data count is 12 bytes, the 12 th byte of data is ignored, and the module check character is automatically added. The module check character is data used to determine the bar code pattern. The check character is not included in the print data. Excluding NSC and module check characters, prints a short bar code from 10 positions (d2 d11) and six columns. (1) Spec.: When the bar code data is input as 12 bytes, the command is canceled at that point and subsequent data is handled as normal data. (2) Spec.: When n 11, 12, the command is canceled and subsequent data is handled as normal data. 3-104

Transmission Data from Host PC d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 Print Data 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 0 0 - - 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 d2 d3 d9 d10 d11 0 0 to 9 0 to 9 1 0 0 - - 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 d2 d3 d9 d10 d11 1 0 to 9 0 to 9 2 0 0 - - 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 d2 d3 d9 d10 d11 2 0 to 9 0 to 9 3 to 9 0 0 - - - 0 to 9 0 to 9 d2 d3 d4 d10 d11 3 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 1 to 9 0 - - - - 0 to 9 d2 d3 d4 d5 d11 4 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 1 to 9 - - - - 5 to 9 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d11 The portions indicated by - in the table specifies 0 (30H). When 1 d6 9, always specify 5 d11 9. Left, center and right guard cars are automatically added. JAN13/EAN13 (m = 2, 67) Module check character (1 byte) is processed as shown below. When the processed bar code data count is 12 bytes, the module check character is automatically added. When the processed bar code data count is 13 bytes, the 13 th byte of data is ignored, and the module check character is automatically added. left, center and right guard cars are automatically added. (1) Spec.: When the bar code data is input as 13 bytes, the command is canceled at that point and subsequent data is handled as normal data. (2) Spec.: When n 12, 13, the command is canceled and subsequent data is handled as normal data. JAN8/EAN8 (m = 3, 68) Module check character (1 byte) is processed as shown below. When the processed bar code data count is 7 bytes, the module check character is automatically added. When the processed bar code data count is 8 bytes, the 8 th byte of data is ignored, and the module check character is automatically added. Left, center and right guard cars are automatically added. (1) Spec.: When the bar code data is input as 8 bytes, the command is canceled at that point and subsequent data is handled as normal data. (2) Spec.: When n 7, 8, the command is canceled and subsequent data is handled as normal data. CODE39 (m = 4, 69) Start code (ASCII = * /Hex = 2AH/Decimal = 42) is processed as shown below. When the 1 st byte data (d1) of the bar code is *, the printer processes that data as a start code. When the 1 st byte data (d1) of the bar code is not *, the printer automatically adds a start code. Stop code (ASCII = * /Hex = 2AH/Decimal = 42) is processed as shown below. When the final data (dk/dn) of the bar code is *, the printer processes that data as a stop code. When the final data (dk/dn) of the bar code not is *, the printer automatically adds a stop code. When there is * in the bar code data, the printer handles it as a stop code. In such cases, after the * the bar code process ends and the next data is printed. The check digit is not calculate or added. ITF (Interleaved 2 of 5 ) (m = 5, 70 ) Start and stop codes are automatically included. The check digit is not calculate or added. The ITF bar code data count is always an odd number. Spec. 1: If the data count is odd, the final data is ignored. Spec. 2: If n is odd, the command is terminated and subsequent data is processed as normal data. CODABAR (NW-7) (m = 6, 71) Start and stop codes are not automatically included. Therefore, start and stop codes must be added to the data and sent. The start code specifies the header data (d1) using ASCII = A to D /Hex = 41H to 44H/Decimal = 65 to 68. The stop code specifies the header data (dk/dn) using ASCII = A to D /Hex = 41H to 44H/Decimal = 65 to 68. The start/stop codes ASCII = A to D /Hex = 41H to 44H/Decimal = 65 to 68 cannot be specified in bar code data. The check digit is not calculate or added. 3-105

CODE93 (m = 72) Start and stop codes are automatically included. 2-bytes of check digits are automatically calculated and added. The following shows the process of special characters of HRI characters. Start and stop codes of HRI print. HRI control codes print + a letter of the alphabet. Control Character HRI Character Control Character HRI Character ASCII Hex. Dec. ASCII Hex. Dec. NUL 00 0 U DLE 10 16 P SOH 01 1 A DC1 11 17 Q STX 02 2 B DC2 12 18 R ETX 03 3 C DC3 13 19 S EOT 04 4 D DC4 14 20 T ENQ 05 5 E NAK 15 21 U ACK 06 6 F SYN 16 22 V BEL 07 7 G ETB 17 23 W BS 08 8 H CAN 18 24 X HT 09 9 I EM 19 25 Y LF 0A 10 J SUB 1A 26 Z VT 0B 11 K ESC 1B 27 A FF 0C 12 L FS 1C 28 B CR 0D 13 M GS 1D 29 C SO 0E 14 N RS 1E 30 D SI 0F 15 O US 1F 31 E DEL 7F 127 T CODE128 (m = 73 ) The first two bytes of data (d1, d2) always specifies the code set selection character (CODE A, CODE B, CODE C). When the header of the bar code data string is not a code set selected character, the command is terminated, and subsequent data is processed as normal data. 1 byte of check digits are automatically calculated and added. Stop codes are automatically added. When HRI additions are specified special HRI characters are processed as shown below. Shift character (SHIFT) and code set selection characters are not printed in HRI. HRI characters of function characters (FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, FNC4), control characters (Hex:00H to 1FH, 7FH/Decimal:0 to 31, 127) are space characters. With CODE128 bar codes, it is possible to show 1 character or two digits of numbers of full ASCII 128 character collection with one bar code character by combining 103 types of bar code characters and 3 types of code sets. Code set A 00H to 5FH ASCII characters can be expressed. Code set B 20H to 7FH ASCII characters can be expressed. Code set C It is possible to express two digit numbers with one character (00 to 99: 100 types) In addition to the above characters, CODE128 has the following special characters. Shift characters (SHIFT) In code set A, immediately after SHIFT, one character is handled as a code set B character. In code set B, immediately after, one character is handled as a code set A character. Note that cannot be used with code set C. Code set selection characters (CODE A, CODE B, CODE C) The following code sets are switched to A, B or C. Function characters (FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, FNC4) The use of function characters varies according to the function. Note that it is possible to use only FNC1 in code set C. See the code table on the next page for the range of data that can be processed in each code set. When a character that cannot be used with the selected code set is received, the command is terminated at that point, and subsequent data is processed as normal data. 3-106

d Character d Character Hexadecimal Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C Hexadecimal Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C 00 0 NUL 00 47 71 G G 71 01 1 SOH 01 48 72 H H 72 02 2 STX 02 49 73 I I 73 03 3 ETX 03 4A 74 J J 74 04 4 EOT 04 4B 75 K K 75 05 5 ENQ 05 4C 76 L L 76 06 6 ACK 06 4D 77 M M 77 07 7 BEL 07 4E 78 N N 78 08 8 BS 08 4F 79 O O 79 09 9 HT 09 50 80 P P 80 0A 10 LF 10 51 81 Q Q 81 0B 11 VT 11 52 82 R R 82 0C 12 FF 12 53 83 S S 83 0D 13 CR 13 54 84 T T 84 0E 14 SO 14 55 85 U U 85 0F 15 SI 15 56 86 V V 86 10 16 DLE 16 57 87 W W 87 11 17 DC1 17 58 88 X X 88 12 18 DC2 18 59 89 Y Y 89 13 19 DC3 19 5A 90 Z Z 90 14 20 DC4 20 5B 91 [ [ 91 15 21 NAK 21 5C 92 \ \ 92 16 22 SYN 22 5D 93 ] ] 93 17 23 ETB 23 5E 94 ^ ^ 94 18 24 CAN 24 5F 95 95 19 25 EM 25 60 96 ` 96 1A 26 SUB 26 61 97 a 97 1B 27 ESC 27 62 98 b 98 1C 28 FS 28 63 99 c 99 1D 29 GS 29 64 100 d 1E 30 RS 30 65 101 e 1F 31 US 31 66 102 f 20 32 SP SP 32 67 103 g 21 33!! 33 68 104 h 22 34 34 69 105 i 23 35 # # 35 6A 106 j 24 36 $ $ 36 6B 107 k 25 37 % % 37 6C 108 l 26 38 & & 38 6D 109 m 27 39 39 6E 110 n 28 40 ( ( 40 6F 111 o 29 41 ) ) 41 70 112 p 2A 42 * * 42 71 113 q 2B 43 + + 43 72 114 r 2C 44,, 44 73 115 s 2D 45 - - 45 74 116 t 2E 46.. 46 75 117 u 2F 47 / / 47 76 118 v 30 48 0 0 48 77 119 w 31 49 1 1 49 78 120 x 32 50 2 2 50 79 121 y 33 51 3 3 51 7A 122 z 34 52 4 4 52 7B,7B 123 { 35 53 5 5 53 7C 124 36 54 6 6 54 7D 125 } 37 55 7 7 55 7E 126 to 38 56 8 8 56 7F 127 DEL 39 57 9 9 57 3A 58 : : 58 3B 59 ; ; 59 d Character 3C 60 < < 60 Hexadecimal Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C 3D 61 = = 61 7B, 31 123, 49 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1 3E 62 > > 62 7B, 32 123, 50 FNC2 FNC2 3F 63?? 63 7B, 33 123, 51 FNC3 FNC3 40 64 @ @ 64 7B, 34 123, 52 FNC4 FNC4 41 65 A A 65 7B, 41 123, 65 CODE A CODE A 42 66 B B 66 7B, 42 123, 66 CODE B CODE B 43 67 C C 67 7B, 43 123, 67 CODE C CODE C 44 68 D D 68 7B, 53 123, 83 SHIFT SHIFT 45 69 E E 69 46 70 F F 70 3-107

Special characters are specified by *{ and one character that followed (a total of two characters). The ASCII code character { itself is specified by continuously sending { of two characters. When the combination of { and one character immediately after are not either special character, the command is terminated at that point, and subsequent data is processed as normal data. Special Character Transmission data ASCII Hex. Dec. SHIFT {S 7B, 53 123, 83 CODE A {A 7B, 41 123, 65 CODE B {B 7B, 42 123, 66 CODE C {C 7B, 43 123, 67 FNC1 {1 7B, 31 123, 49 FNC2 {2 7B, 32 123, 50 FNC3 {3 7B, 33 123, 51 FNC4 {4 7B, 34 123, 52 { {{ 7B, 7B 123, 123 Note This command can be used if thermal is selected as the active sheet. [STAR] When printing bar codes that require a check digit, even if the check digit is sent as a bar code, the printer prints the calculated check digit. <Slip>, <ation> Specified byte count is ignored. [Reference] GS H, GS f, GS h, GS w 3-108

GS w n [Name] Set bar code horizontal size [Code] ASCII GS w n Hexadecimal 1D 77 n Decimal 29 119 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 6 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 3 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets bar code horizontal size. n Module Width (mm) of Multi-level Binary Level Bar Codes Bar Codes Fine Element Width (mm) Bold Element Width (mm) 1 0.141 0.141 0.423 2 0.282 0.282 0.706 3 0.423 0.423 1.129 4 0.564 0.564 1.411 5 0.706 0.706 1.834 6 0.847 0.847 2.258 [Details] [STAR] A multi-level code indicates the following bar code fonts. UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN13/EAN13, JAN8/EAN8, CODE93, CODE128 A binary level code indicates the following bar code fonts. CODE39, ITF, CODABAR (NW-7) This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. The bar codes that are printed do not conform to each standard, so you should confirm before actual use. Particularly, with n = 1 is specified, bar codes are not guaranteed. Module widths on STAR printers are shown below. n Module Width (mm) of Multi-level Binary Level Bar Codes Bar Codes Fine Element Width (mm) Bold Element Width (mm) 1 0125 0.125 0.375 2 0.25 0.25 0.625 3 0.375 0.375 1.000 4 0.5 0.5 1.250 5 0.625 0.625 1.625 6 0.75 0.75 2.125 <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS k, ESC @ 3-109

3-3-11) Macro Related Commands GS : [Name] Start/end macro definition [Code] ASCII GS : Hexadecimal 1D 3A Decimal 29 58 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Starts and ends macro definition. [Details] [STAR] When this command is input in normal operations, specify the start of macro definition. When this command is input during macro definition, specify the end of macro definition. Printing is executed while defining a macro. The data count that is possible in macro definition is up to 2048 bytes. The portion that exceeds 2048 bytes is not defined. Macro is undefined if GS : is input immediately after GS :. When macro definition execution (GS ^) is input while defining a macro, the macro definition is terminated and the defined contents are cleared. The macro default is undefined. The defined content is cleared by initializing the printer (ESC @). Macro is executed using GS ^. The following commands must not be defined during a macro. FS q,, GS ^, GS v 0, GS ( A, GS ( L/GS 8 L If a raster graphic command (GS v) is inserted in data while a macro is defined, macro definition is ended immediately as undefined, and processing of the raster graphic is entered. Users should be aware of this. [Reference] GS ^, FS q, GS ( A, GS ( L/GS 8 L, GS v 0 3-110

GS ^ r t m [Name] Execute macro [Code] ASCII GS ^ r t m Hexadecimal 1D 5E r t m Decimal 29 94 r t m [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 r 255 0 t 255 0 m 1 Slip : 0 r 255 0 t 255 0 m 1 ation : 0 r 255 0 t 255 0 m 1 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Executes the defined macro. r specifies the macro execution count. t specifies the time to wait for macro execution. m specifies the macro execution mode. m = 0: Executes r times continuously with the time gaps specified by t. m = 1: After the time specified by t passes, PAPER OUT LED flashes and the FEED switch waits to be pressed. Executes macro one time after the FEED switch is pressed. This operation is repeated r times. [Details] If a macro is undefined, and r = 0, this command is ignored. When this command is processed during macro definition, the macro definition is terminated and the defined contents are cleared. Waits approximately (t x 100 m) sec after one macro execution by specifying t. If m = 1, and ESC C 5 sets the panel switch to invalid, the FEED switch is temporarily valid only until the FEED switch is pressed. At that time, a paper feed using the FEED switch is not executed. If the printer is waiting for the FEED switch to be pressed, and DLE ENQ 0 is executed, the macro is executed one time. It is possible to check whether the printer is waiting for the FEED switch to be press using DLE EOT 1 (printer information) or ASB status. Macro is defined using GS :. The macro function is helpful in printing the same data repeatedly. To define a macro, send GS : before and after the data you want to print repeatedly. Use GS ^ to repeatedly print the same data, and execute the macro. The macro function makes it possible to omit the step of having to send the all of the print data each time. [Reference] GS :, ESC c 5, DLE EOT 1, DLE ENQ 0, GS v 3-111

3-3-12) Mechanical Control Related Commands ESC < [Name] Return Home [Code] ASCII ESC < Hexadecimal 1B 3C Decimal 27 60 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 2 bytes ignored. 3-112

ESC U n [Name] Specify/cancel single-direction printing [Code] ASCII ESC U n Hexadecimal 1B 55 n Decimal 27 85 n [Defined Area] Thermal : - Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] <Thermal> Only setting is valid After switching to slip or validation, the setting is valid for line mode ad page mode. <Slip, ation> Specifies or cancels single-direction printing. When n = <*******0>B: Cancels single-direction printing. (Specifies bi-directional printing.) When n = <*******1>B: Specifies single-direction printing. [Details] This mode can be set independently for line mode and page mode. Setting is shared by slip and validation. When this command is executed when standard mode is selected, it specifies or cancels singledirection printing in standard mode. When this command is executed when page mode is selected, it specifies or cancels single-direction printing in page mode. When single-direction printing is canceled, the printer automatically uses bi-directional printing. When singe-direction printing is specified, printing is performed from left to right. When single-direction printing is specified in page mode, all data printed using FF or ESC FF is singledirection. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Single-direction printing prints by aligning the top and bottom edges of the print data when printing doublehigh characters, download and bit images, bar codes and two-dimensional bar codes. (Print position is not mis-positioned between lines.) [Reference] FF, ESC FF, ESC @ 3-113

(1) GS V m, (2) GS V m n [Name] Cut paper [Code] (1) ASCII GS V m Hexadecimal 1D 56 m Decimal 29 86 m (2) ASCII GS V m n Hexadecimal 1D 56 m n Decimal 29 86 m n [Defined Area] Thermal : (1) m = 0, 1, 48, 49 (2) m = 65, 66, 0 n 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Executes a paper cut on the specified paper. m Function (1) 0, 48 Executes full cut 1, 49 Executes partial cut (leaving one uncut portion) (2) 65 Executes paper feed of (cutting position + [n x basic calculated pitch]) and full cut 66 Executes paper feed of (cutting position + [n x basic calculated pitch]) and partial cut (leaving one uncut portion) [Details] This command is valid only when thermal is selected as the active sheet by ESC c 0. When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when processed at the top of the line. When using this command, there is a gap between the auto-cutter position and the printing position. For (1) This command can be used on printers equipped with an auto-cutter. For (2) When n = 0, paper is cut after being fed to the cutting position. When n 0, paper is cut after being fed from the cutting position a further [n x basic calculated pitch]. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. The paper feed amount is calculated by the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. On models not equipped with the auto-cutter, only a paper feed of the specified amount is executed. Models that do not allow full cuts execute a partial cut. Models that do not allow partial cuts execute a full cut. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. [STAR] Refer to each printer s product specifications manual for the specifications on the auto-cutter function. Models without an auto-cutter do not cut paper. However, commands (n = 65, 66) accompanying the paper feed operation of (cutting position + [n x basic calculated pitch]), execute a paper feed of (tear bar position + [n x basic calculated pitch]). <Slip>, <ation> (1) 3 bytes ignored (2) 4 bytes ignored [Reference] ESC c 0, GS P, ESC i, ESC m 3-114

ESC F n [Name] Specify/cancel reverse discharge of cut paper [Code] ASCII ESC F n Hexadecimal 1B 46 n Decimal 27 70 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] 3 bytes ignored 3-115

ESC q [Name] Release [Code] ASCII ESC q Hexadecimal 1B 71 Decimal 27 113 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> 2 bytes ignored <Slip>, <ation> Releases cut paper. [Details] [STAR] When slip or validation is selected as the active paper, the printer executes a release and waits for the paper to be removed. Thereafter, the printer selects thermal as the active paper. This command is valid only at the top of the line in standard mode. After discharging the paper, thermal is selected. [Reference] ESC c 0 3-116

3-3-13) MICR Related Commands DLE EOT 8 1 [Name] Real-time MICR status transmission [Code] ASCII DLE EOT 8 1 Hexadecimal 10 04 08 01 Decimal 16 4 8 1 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sends MICR status in real-time. [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. This command is executed in real-time when the printer receives it. Precautions for using the real-time command. Users should be careful with this command because when a code string is received that matches a code composing codes, operations are the same as this command. Ex.: When the code string exists in the graphics data. This command must not be used by interrupting other command code strings. Ex.: Using this command in graphics data. When using a serial interface, this command is executed even when the printer is offline, the reception buffer is full or an error has occurred. When using a parallel interface, this command is not executed when the printer is offline, the reception buffer is full or an error has occurred because the printer is BUSY and cannot receive data from the host PC. It is possible to change the BUSY condition using the DIP switches. Only reception buffer full When offline, error occurs, or reception buffer is full This command cannot be executed when the printer is invalid using ESC =. This function cannot be used while block data [header to NUL] is being sent. Status byte is 1 byte. The sent MICR status is as follows. Bit Status 0 1 7 Fixed at 0 - - 6 BOF detector Has paper No paper 5 COF detector Has paper No paper 4 Fixed at 1 - - 3 Slip paper or cleaning sheet Not waiting for insertion Waiting for insertion 2 MICR function Selected Not selected 1 Fixed at 1 - - 0 Fixed at 0 - - When using this command, observe the following rules. If the rules are not followed, the status may not be sent. When the DLE EOT command is sent, do not send the next command until the status is received. If it is necessary to continuously get multiple real-time statuses, this can be executed up to nine times. In that case, do not send the next command until all statuses are received. When using a serial interface, check that the host PC can receive data. 3-117

When using a parallel interface, real-time statuses are temporarily stored in the printer s reception buffer as with other reception data (excluding ASB status). Also, when the host PC enters reverse mode, data is sent in order from the header of the transmission buffer. The amount of data that exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer is erased. When using this command, the host PC should enter the reverse mode immediately to receive the status. Real-time status can be identified from other transmission data using bits 0, 1, 4, and 7. When data sent from the printer is 0xx1xx10 (x = 0 or 1), the host PC handles that data as a real-time status. [Reference] ESC = 3-118

FS ( f pl ph [n m]1... [n m]k [Name] Select MICR reading operation [Code] ASCII FS ( f pl ph [n m]1... [n m]k Hexadecimal 1C 28 66 pl ph [n m]1... [n m]k Decimal 28 40 102 pl ph [n m]1... [n m]k [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 3, 48 n 51 When n = 0, 48: 0 m 255 When n = 1, 49: 0 m 255 When n = 2, 50: m = 0, 1, 48, 49 When n = 3, 51: m = 0, 1, 48, 49 Slip : 0 n 3, 48 n 51 When n = 0, 48: 0 m 255 When n = 1, 49: 0 m 255 When n = 2, 50: m = 0, 1, 48, 49 When n = 3, 51: m = 0, 1, 48, 49 ation : 0 n 3, 48 n 51 When n = 0, 48: 0 m 255 When n = 1, 49: 0 m 255 When n = 2, 50: m = 0, 1, 48, 49 When n = 3, 51: m = 0, 1, 48, 49 [Initial Value] Thermal : m = 0 for all n Slip : m = 0 for all n ation : m = 0 for all n [Function] Selects MICR reading operation. pl, ph specify the parameter count after ph ([n m]1 [n m]k) with (pl + ph 256) bytes. Specify the reading function using n. n Function 0, 48 Specifies reading method for characters that are not recognized. 1, 49 Specifies to add/not add detailed information to the reading results when ending in error. 2, 50 Specifies the added function when the reading operation ends in error. 3, 51 Specifies header of transfer data. When n = 0, 48, specify the method to process characters that were not recognized in a magnetic waveform analysis using m. m Function 0 Terminates reading process when unrecognizable characters are detected. 1 to 255 Continues reading by replacing unrecognizable characters with?. Terminates reading operation when characters replaced with? exceed m + 1. Specifies to add/not add detailed information to the reading results when ending in error with m, when n = 1, 49. m Function 0 Does not add detailed information. 1 Adds detailed information. 3-119

Specify the added function when the reading operation ends in error, with m, when n = 2, 50. m Function 0, 48 After sending the reading results, ends MICR function. 1, 49 Sends reading results and continues MICR function after ending with the following errors. When the length of the inserted sheet is outside of the standard value When magnet data that cannot be read is detected in the waveform When characters cannot be recognized with magnetic waveform analysis When an error is detected from the noise measurement When processing of FS a 0 is stopped because the cover is open When processing of FS a 0 is stopped because of a paper jam Specify the header of the reading results returned to the host by m, when n = 3, 51. m Function 0, 48 Specifies a header of 1 byte Hex = 5FH/Decimal = 95 1, 49 Specifies a header with a 2-byte recognition code First Byte: Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55 Second Byte: Hex = 2AH/Decimal = 42 [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. The n = 0, 48 setting affects the GS function (unsupported commands with G <Function 60> (TM-H6000III). The value set by this command affects FS a 0. The reading results executed before this command are unaffected. Regardless of the setting of n = 0, 48, the reading results where unrecognizable characters are detected by an analysis of the magnetic waveform end in error. When m = 1 (add detailed information) is selected by specifying n = 1, 49, the transfer of reading results using FS a 0 is composed of [header + reading status + detailed information + delimiter data + read data + NUL]. [Header] is 1 byte or 2 bytes specified by n = 3, 51. [Detailed information] is the following byte data. Hex Detailed Information 40 Normal end 41 FS a 0 unexecuted 42 Check insertion waiting state canceled by command 43 Time set by ESC f passed; check insertion waiting state canceled 44 Length of inserted check is outside of the standard value 45 No magnetic waveform detected while reading 46 Detected unrecognizable characters in waveform analysis 47 Non-recoverable error during processing of FS a 0, or automatically recoverable error occurred 48 Error detected in noise measurement 49 Processing of FS a 0 stopped because the cover is open 4A Processing of FS a 0 stopped because of a paper jam [Delimiter data] is a 1-byte code of Hex = 1FH/Decimal = 31. [Read information] is added when results of FS a 0 end normally, or m 0 with specification of n = 0, 48, and the number of? is less than m. [NUL] is a 1-byte code of Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0. When m = 0, 48 (after sending the reading results, MICR function ends) is selected with specification of n = 2, 50, after sending the reading results, the printer performs the following processes when it receives FS a 0. Check discharge (including waiting time for check to be discharged) MICR status is [MICR not-selected state]. Select roll paper for the active sheet. Moves print position to left side of print region. The printer status is set to the top of line and no print data in print buffer. This setting of this command is valid until ESC!, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is off. After sending the reading results, the MICR function is continued for any one of the following conditions. In such a case, the check is not discharged, and the MICR status is not changed. The check reading result is normal. The check reading result is not normal. When m 0 (switching unrecognizable characters to? ) with specification of n = 0, 48, and when read information is added to the reading results When m = 1, 49 (continue MICR function), with specification of n = 2, 50, and cause of error is set by the command [Reference] FS a 0, GS ( G 3-120

FS a 0 [Name] Decode check paper [Code] ASCII FS a 0 n Hexadecimal 1C 61 30 n Decimal 28 97 48 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Selects MICR function by specification of n, and reads magnetic ink characters. Bit Status 0 1 7 Fixed at 0 - - 6 Fixed at 0 - - 5 Fixed at 0 - - 4 Fixed at 0 - - 3 Fixed at 0 - - 2 Fixed at 0 - - 1 Select reading font See the table below. 0 Select reading font See the table below. Select reading font Bit 1 Bit 0 Font 0 0 E13B 0 1 CMC7 1 0 Undefined 1 1 Undefined If the value of n is outside the defined range, 4 bytes are ignored. [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. This command is valid only at the top of the line in standard mode. After starting reading of magnetic ink, do not perform the following operations until the transmission of read data is completed. Open/close cover Press the operation panel button. Execute DLE DC4 <Function 8> (clear buffer) Read fonts indicate the character standard that converts readable waveforms to character data. When a font other than the prescribed font is specified, this command is ignored. This command is ignored when in page mode. If the MICR function is not selected when this command is executed, the MICR function is automatically selected and the printer enters a check insertion wait state. The printer continues waiting for the check to be inserted until the check is inserted or the following statuses occur. Waiting time t1 set by ESC f is passed. Reset printer Power is off The status of MICR function selected/not selected can be checked using expanded ASB status or DLE EOT 8 1 (MICR status). When in the check insertion waiting state, do not execute anything other than real-time commands. It is possible to cancel the check insertion waiting state using DLE ENQ 3. When doing so, the data being printed and reception buffer are cleared. The status of check insertion waiting state can be checked using expanded ASB status or DLE EOT 8 1 (MICR status) with GS ( B. The reading results of the magnetic ink are erased by executing this command, executing ESC @, resetting the printer or turning the power off. The printer sends reading results to the host PC after reading the magnetic ink. 3-121

When the reading operation ends normally, send [header + reading status (normal) + reading data + NUL]. When the reading operation ends in error, send [header + reading status (error) + NUL]. [Detailed information + delimiter data], [read data] or [detailed information + delimiter data + read data] are added after [reading status (normal)] by the FS ( F setting. The header can be set to the following by FS ( f. 1 byte of header (Hex = 5FH/Decimal = 95) 2 bytes of header with identifier (Hex = 37H + 2AH/Decimal = 55 + 42) Reading status Bit Status 0 1 7 Fixed at 0 - - 6 Fixed at 1 - - 5 Reading operation Normal end End in error 4 Reread OK NO 3 Detailed Information None Added 2 Undefined - - 1 Undefined - - 0 Read Font E13B CMC7 Detailed information is 1 byte of data. When the reading results are normal, this information is normal (Hex = 40H/Decimal = 64). When the reading results are normal, this information is data that responds to the error. Refer to GS (f (n = 1, 49a for details on detailed information. Delimiter data is Hex = 1FH/Decimal = 31. Detailed information and delimiter data continue. When the reading status is detailed information added, delimiter data continues after the detailed information. The reading data is a series of ASCII codes that correspond to the reading results. When the reading status is an error,? is included in the read data. See GS ( G <Function 60> for the detailed information of read data. NUL is Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0. Bit 0 of the read status indicates a recognized character font. When ended in error, bit 0 has no meaning. For the following, it is not possible to reread. (Bit 4 = 1) When the printer does not support the rereading function. When the printer reaches the maximum rereading count. (maximum rereading count differs according to the model) When MICR has not been selected. Selected/not selected can be checked using expanded ASB status or DLE EOT 8 1 (MICR status) with GS ( B. When the reading status is bit 4 = 0 (reread possible) the FS a 0, FS a 1, FS a 2, FS b, FS ( e, GS ( G and real-time commands are executed. When other codes are processed, the MICR function is ended. When the reading status is bit 4 = 1 (reread possible) the FS a 1, FS a 2, FS b, FS ( e, GS ( G and real-time commands are executed. When other codes are being processed, the MICR function ends. The MICR function ending process is below. The MICR function enters a non-selected state. Check discharge (including waiting time for check to be discharged) Select thermal for the active sheet. Moves print position to left side of print region. The printer status is set to the top of line and no print data in print buffer. In the following cases, the check paper is not discharged after the rereading results are sent. When the reading operation ends normally When set to send reading results using FS ( f even if the reading operation ended in error Set to continue the MICR function using FS ( f even if the MICR function does not end normally. 3-122

When using the Xon/Xoff mode in communications with the printer on a serial interface, it is possible to use the Xoff code in a data string of [header to NUL]. When using this command, observe the following rules. When sending commands from the host PC, send data after receiving previous data from the printer. When using a serial interface, configure operations for the host PC to use the printer only when the printer is in the READY state. For a parallel interface data of [header to NUL] is temporarily stored (excluding ASB status) in the transfer buffer on the printer in the same way as other transfer data. Also, when the host enters reverse mode, data is sent in order starting from the transfer buffer. The amount of data that exceeds the capacity of the transfer buffer is ignored. When using this command, the host must enter the reverse mode to receive the status. It is possible to determine other transfer data and reading results of magnetic ink characters using specific data of the transfer data block. When the header from the printer is [Hex = 5FH/Decimal = 95] or [Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55], up to NUL [Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0] is handled as a data group. Determine according to the combination of the header and identifier. Note TM-H6000III Reread function is not supported. The reading status is always [reread impossible (bit 4 = 1]. Discharge operations when the MICR function ends is to the forward direction regardless of the ESC F settings. The readable characters printed by CMC7 are the next 15 types. Character Types Numbers Special Characters Transmission data ASCII 0 to 9 # / = > ^ Hex 31 to 39 23 2F 3D 3E 5F Decimal 48 to 57 35 47 61 62 94 This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( G <Function 61> is recommended for the MICR function. [Reference] DLE DC4 <Function 8>, ESC f, DLE EOT 8 1, DLE ENQ 3, GS ( B, FS ( f, GS ( G, FS a 0, FS a 1, FS a 2, FS b, FS ( e, DLE ENQ, ESC F 3-123

FS a 1 [Name] Check paper feed to printing start position [Code] ASCII FS a 1 Hexadecimal 1C 61 31 Decimal 28 97 49 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Feeds checks to the print starting position and selects slip as the active sheet. [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. This command is invalid when the MICR function is not selected. The MICR function is selected by FS a 0. When this command is executed, the reading status of bit 4 for FS b is ON (reread not possible). After loading the check paper, the printer ends the MICR function and selects slip as the active sheet. The printer status at that time is set to the top of line and no print data in print buffer. [Reference] GS ( G, FS a 0, FS b 3-124

FS a 2 [Name] Check paper discharge [Code] ASCII FS a 2 Hexadecimal 1C 61 32 Decimal 28 97 50 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Discharges check paper and selects thermal as the print sheet. Note This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( G <Function 85> is recommended as the check paper discharge command. [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. This command is invalid when the MICR function is not selected. The MICR function is selected by FS a 0. When this command is executed, the reading status of bit 4 for FS b is ON (reread not possible). After discharging the check paper, the printer ends the MICR function and selects roll paper as the set sheet. The printer status at that time is set to the top of line and no print data in print buffer. Note The printer discharges paper in the forward direction, when the MICR function ends regardless of the ESC F settings. [Reference] GS ( G <Function 85>, FS a 0, FS b, ESC F 3-125

FS b [Name] Send request of reading results of check paper [Code] ASCII FS b Hexadecimal 1C 62 Decimal 28 98 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Resends the MICR reading results of before using FS a 0. Note This command is not recommended. It will not be supported in future models. GS ( G <Function 61> is recommended as the resend command for the MICR reading results. [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. Sent information is the same as that sent earlier by FS a 0. If FS a 0 is not executed before executing this command, the printer sends [header + reading status (error)] to the host PC. In such cases, the read data is not added. If detailed information added is not selected by FS ( f, the detailed information is as follows. FS a 0 is not yet executed (Hex = 41H/Decimal = 65). Refer to FS a 0 for details related to resending reading results. [Reference] GS ( G <Function 61>, FS a 0, FS ( F 3-126

FS c [Name] MICR mechanism cleaning [Code] ASCII FS c Hexadecimal 1C 63 Decimal 28 99 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Cleans the MICR mechanism. [Details] This command is valid only on printers equipped with MICR. This command is valid only at the top of the line in standard mode. This command is ignored when in page mode. The printer enters a cleaning sheet insertion waiting state when this command is executed. Insert the cleaning card into the paper feed inlet. The printer idles until the cleaning sheet is inserted. When the waiting time t1 set by ESC f is passed, the printer is reset, or the power is turned OFF. When the printer is in the cleaning sheet insertion waiting state, only the real-time commands are valid. It is possible to cancel the idle state using DLE ENQ 3. When doing so, the data in the print buffer and reception buffer is cleared. It is possible to check the cleaning sheet idle state using DLE EOT 8 1 (MICR status), or expanded ASB status with GS ( B. After cleaning MICR, the printer automatically selects the roll paper as the set sheet. Also, the printing position is moved to the left edge in the print region, and the printer status is set to no print data in print buffer. Note Discharge operations when the MICR function ends is to the forward direction regardless of the ESC F settings. [Reference] ESC f, DLE ENQ 3, DLE EOT 8 1, GS ( B, ESC F 3-127

3-3-14) Other Commands DLE ENQ n [Name] Real-time request to printer [Code] ASCII DLE ENQ n Hexadecimal 10 05 n Decimal 16 5 n [Defined Area] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0, 3 ation : n = 0, 3 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Responds in real-time to requests from the host using specification of n. n = 0: Executes the same process when pressing the switch one time when waiting for the switch to be pressed during macro execution. n = 3: After clearing the reception buffer and print buffer, cancels the paper insertion waiting state. [Details] This command is executed in real-time when the printer receives it. Precautions for using the real-time command. Users should be careful with this command because when a code string is received that matches a code composing codes, operations are the same as this command. Ex.: When the code string exists in the graphics data. This command must not be used by interrupting other command code strings. Ex.: Using this command in graphics data. This function cannot be used while block data [header to NUL] is being sent. N = 0 is effective while the GS ^ macro is executing and waiting input of the FEED switch. n = 3 is valid only when in the cut paper insertion waiting state. After the cut paper insertion waiting state is terminated, thermal is selected as the active sheet. In this state can be checked whether the printer is in the cut paper insertion waiting state using the ASB status customized by GS ( B, or the following states. Slip paper insertion waiting state DLE EOT 5 (Slip status) ation paper insertion waiting state: DLE EOT 6 (ation status) Check paper/cleaning paper insertion waiting state: DLE EOT 8 1 (MICR status) After executing n = 3, the left edge of the print region becomes the printing position. The printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. This command is not executed when the printer is offline, the reception buffer is full or an error has occurred because the printer is BUSY and cannot receive data from the host PC. It is possible to change the BUSY condition using the DIP switches. Only reception buffer full When offline, error occurs, or reception buffer is full This command cannot be executed when the printer is invalid using ESC =. This function cannot be used while block data [header to NUL] is being sent. Note Other than this command, when a data string of <10>H <05>H <n> (n = 0, 3) is received, operations that are the same as this command are used so the user must be careful. [Ex.:] : In ESC * m nl nh [d] k, d1 = <10>H d2 = <05>H d3 = <00>H This command must not be used to interrupt code strings of other commands composed by codes of more than 2 bytes. [Ex.:]: If the host side tries to send ESC 3 n, it is processed as ESC 3 10H when DLE ENQ 0 at the point up to ESC 3 is sent. Therefore, the user must be careful. [Reference] GS ^, ESC W, DLE EOT, ESC =, ESC!, ESC 3, ESC @, Appendix 2 3-128

DLE DC4 1 m t [Name] Real-time output of specified pulse [Code] ASCII DLE DC4 fn m t Hexadecimal 10 14 fn m t Decimal 16 20 fn m t [Defined Area] Thermal : fn = 1 m = 0, 1 1 t 8 Slip : fn = 1 m = 0, 1 1 t 8 ation : fn = 1 m = 0, 1 1 t 8 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Outputs the signal specified by t for the connector pin specified by m. m = 0: Drawer kick connector #2 pin m = 1: Drawer kick connector #5 pin On time is t x 100 msec; off time is t x 100 msec. [Details] [STAR] This command is executed in real-time when the printer receives it. This command is invalid in the following states. Non-recoverable errors Outputting of pulses to the connector pins (executing ESC p command) During transmission of block data [header to NUL] This command is not executed when the printer is offline, the reception buffer is full or an error has occurred because the printer is BUSY and cannot receive data from the host PC. It is possible to change the BUSY condition using the DIP switches. Only reception buffer full When offline, error occurs, or reception buffer is full This command cannot be executed when the printer is invalid using ESC =. Print operation and drawer cannot be driven simultaneously. Therefore, this command is processed when read from the data buffer. If the printer is printing at that time, the drawer is driven after waiting for printing to end, so it is not possible to operate in real-time because of the reception buffer status. [Reference] ESC p 3-129

DLE DC4 2 a b [Name] Execute power off process [Code] ASCII DLE DC4 fn a b Hexadecimal 10 14 02 01 08 Decimal 16 20 2 1 8 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 5 bytes ignored 3-130

DLE DC4 8 d1... d7 Pending [Name] Buffer clear [Code] ASCII DLE DC4 fn d1... d7 Hexadecimal 10 14 fn d1... d7 Decimal 16 20 fn d1... d7 [Defined Area] Thermal : fn = 8 d1 = 1, d2 = 3, d3 = 20, d4 = 1, d5 = 6, d6 = 2, d7 = 8 Slip : fn = 8 d1 = 1, d2 = 3, d3 = 20, d4 = 1, d5 = 6, d6 = 2, d7 = 8 ation : fn = 8 d1 = 1, d2 = 3, d3 = 20, d4 = 1, d5 = 6, d6 = 2, d7 = 8 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Clears all data existing in the reception and print buffers and sends the status. If a code string of this command is included in a parameter of a different command (graphics data, definition data), the printer clears the buffers. Before sending bit image data and definition data, check whether the code string of this command is included. [Details] This command is executed in real-time when the printer receives it. Precautions for using the real-time command. Users should be careful with this command because when a code string is received that matches a code composing codes, operations are the same as this command. Ex.: When the code string exists in the graphics data. This command must not be used by interrupting other command code strings. Ex.: Using this command in graphics data. This function is invalid while block data [header to NUL] is being sent. This command cannot be executed when the printer is invalid using ESC =. When the printer enters a cut paper insertion waiting state, and this command is sent, the insertion waiting state is canceled. Same function as DLE ENQ 3. After executing the command, thermal is selected. When executing this command, and the printer is in the following state, paper is discharged. (If the printer has the paper removal waiting function, this function is included.) When cut paper (slip, validation paper) is selected as the paper type. When the MICR function is valid If this command is executed when the printer is in page mode, the printer returns to standard mode and ESC W is returned to the default setting. This command does not change other command settings (excluding ESC W when in page mode) and does not initialize. When this command is executed, the printer position becomes the left edge of the print region, and the printer status is set to the top of line and no print data. This command is not executed when the printer is offline, the reception buffer is full or an error has occurred because the printer is BUSY and cannot receive data from the host PC. It is possible to change the BUSY condition using the DIP switches. Only reception buffer full When offline, error occurs, or reception buffer is full 3-131

When the buffers are cleared, the following states are sent. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 25H 37 1Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte Observe the following rules when using these functions. When the host PC sends this command, the printer sends response data or the status to the PC. The PC does not send any more data until it receives response data or status from the printer. When using a serial interface, configure operations for the host PC to use the printer only while the printer is in the READY state. When using a parallel interface, data sent by this function ([header to NUL] block) is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer of the printer in the same way as other data. When the host PC enters reverse mode, data is sent from the top of the transmission buffer in order. When the amount of data exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer, data is erased. When using this command, it is important to set operations so that the host PC immediately enters a reverse mode and quickly processes the status transmission. When using the Xon/Xoff mode communications of the serial interface, it is possible to use Xoff in a data string of [header to NUL]. Transmission information of each function can be identified as other transmission data by specific data (identifier) of the transmission data string. When the header sent by the printer is [Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55], data up to NUL [Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0] is handled as one group, and identified by corresponding to the combination of the header and identifier. Note When using the following commands, check whether the code string of this command is included in the parameters of the command. Graphics command : GS ( L/8, ESC *, FS q, GS *, GS v 0 Download command : ESC &, FS 2 [Reference] DLE ENQ, GS ( L/8, ESC *, FS q, GS *, GS v 0, ESC &, FS & 3-132

ESC = n [Name] Select peripheral device [Code] ASCII ESC = n Hexadecimal 1B 3D n Decimal 27 61 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 3 Slip : 1 n 3 ation : 1 n 3 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 1 Slip : n = 1 ation : n = 1 [Function] The host computer selects the device that sends data with the specification of n. n Function 1, 3 Specifies the printer to be valid 2 Specifies the printer to be invalid [Details] If the printer is set to invalid, the printer receives and discards all data from subsequent data other than the real-time command until it is selected to be valid again by this command. Even if the printer is invalid, if the ASB function is valid, and a related state changes, the ASB status is sent. Refer to the ASB function of GS a, FS ( e. This setting for making the printer invalid using this command is valid until n = 1, 3 is sent, or the power is turned off. If n = 2 is set, ESC @ is not executed so the status does not change. [Reference] DLE EOT, DLE ENQ, DLE DC4, GS a, FS ( e, ESC @ 3-133

ESC @ [Name] Initialize printer [Code] ASCII ESC @ Hexadecimal 1B 40 Decimal 27 64 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Clears data in the print buffer and initializes the printer settings to the same state as when the power is on. The following data is maintained. Definition contents of NV bit images Maintenance counter value Bit-customized settings of ASB status Macro definition contents [Details] [STAR] If cut paper is selected, and this command is executed, after discharging the cut paper all settings are initialized. When page mode is selected, and this command is executed, all data in the print region is erased and all settings are initialized. Then, the standard mode is selected. After executing this command, the printing position is moved to the left edge in the print region, and the printer status is set to no print data in print buffer. DIPSW re-read is not performed. Data in the reception buffer is not cleared. This command can cancel all settings such as print mode and line feeds at the same time. The setting of ESC = when this command is executed makes the printer valid with n = 1. The setting of ESC = when the power is turned on makes the printer valid with n = 1. When the setting is n = 2 (printer invalid) with ESC =, this command is ignored. The following contents are initialized by this command. Selection of the paper out detector valid in the output of the paper out signal (ESC c 3) Selection of the paper out detector valid at stopping printing (ESC c 4) [Reference] ESC =, ESC c 3, ESC c 4 3-134

ESC L [Name] Select page mode [Code] ASCII ESC L Hexadecimal 1B 4C Decimal 27 76 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Switches from standard mode to page mode. [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when input at the top of the line. This command is ignored for other conditions. The character expansion position is the starting point specified the selection of character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, in the print region specified by the print region setting (ESC W) in page mode. The following commands switch the settings of these when this command is executed to the settings of page mode because this command has values independent for page and standard mode. ESC SP, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC U, FS S The following commands are ignored in page mode. ESC L, ESC c 0, FS L, FS a 0, FS c, FS q, GS ( A, GS ( G, GS ( L/GS 8 L, GS T The following commands are not affected in page mode. (only settings are valid) ESC V, ESC a, ESC {, GS L, GS W Returns to standard mode by ESC S, FF, ESC @. When the printer is recovered to standard mode using ESC @, all settings are initialized. Standard mode is selected in the default setting. When page mode is selected, the double-density function is invalid. Data expanded in the print region set by ESC W is printed only with FF, ESC FF, in page mode. The LF, CR, ESC J, ESC d commands move the print position, and do not actually print. Note In addition to standard specifications in page mode, slip and validation have the following exceptions. Double-density data of the graphics (bit images) cannot be used. Horizontal 1x of graphics: GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 69> x = 1 Double density bit image: ESC * 1 Standard mode bit images: FS p, GS /, GS v 0 (m = 0, 48) Because font B are characters printed in double-density, they cannot be used in page mode. Font B selection command: ESC!, ESC M [Reference] ESC W, ESC T, ESC SP, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC U, FS S, ESC S, FF, ESC @, Appendix 5 3-135

FS L [Name] Select double-density page mode [Code] ASCII FS L Hexadecimal 1C 4C Decimal 28 76 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> 2 bytes ignored <Slip>, <ation> Switches from standard mode to double-density page mode. [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when input at the top of the line. This command is ignored for other conditions. The character expansion position is the starting point specified the selection of character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, in the print region specified by the print region setting (ESC W) in page mode. The following commands switch the settings of these when this command is executed to the settings of page mode because this command has values independent for page and standard mode. ESC SP, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC U, FS S The following commands are ignored in double-density page mode. ESC L, ESC c 0, FS L, FS a 0, FS c, FS q, GS ( A, GS ( G, GS ( L/GS 8 L, GS T The following commands are not affected in double-density page mode. ESC V, ESC a, ESC {, GS L, GS W Returns to standard mode by ESC S, FF, ESC @. When the printer is recovered to standard mode using ESC @, all settings are initialized. Standard mode is selected in the default setting. If page mode is selected by ESC L, data is processed as single-density. If page mode is selected by this command, data is processed in double-density in both horizontal and vertical directions. Data expanded in the print region set by ESC W is printed only with FF, ESC FF, in page mode. The LF, CR, ESC J, ESC d commands move the print position, and do not actually print. Note This command is valid only when slip or validation is selected as the active sheet. In addition to the standard specifications in double-density page mode, the character adornments shown below do not function. Character Adornment: ESC! (Only emphasized), ESC E, ESC G [Reference] ESC W, ESC T, ESC SP, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC U, FS S, ESC S, FF, ESC @, Appendix 5 3-136

ESC S [Name] Select standard mode [Code] ASCII ESC S Hexadecimal 1B 53 Decimal 27 83 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Switches from page mode or double-density page mode to standard mode. [Details] only when page mode is selected. Page mode is selected by ESC L or FS L. When this command is executed, all data expanded in the print region set by ESC W is cleared. Settings of the print region are initialized in page mode by ESC W. The selection of character print direction in page mode using ESC T is maintained. After executing this command, the printing position is moved to the left edge in the print region, and the printer status is set to no print data in print buffer. The following commands switch the settings of these when this command is executed to the settings of standard mode because this command has values independent for page and standard mode. ESC SP, ESC 2, ESC 3, ESC U, FS S When standard mode is selected, CAN, ESC FF, GS $, GS \ are ignored. When standard mode is selected, only the settings for ESC T and ESC W are valid. Standard mode is selected in the default setting. [Reference] ESC L, FS L, ESC W, ESC T, CAN, ESC FF, GS $, GS \ 3-137

GS P x y [Name] Set basic calculated pitch [Code] ASCII GS P x y Hexadecimal 1D 50 x y Decimal 29 80 x y [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 x 255 0 y 255 Slip : 0 x 255 0 y 255 ation : 0 x 255 0 y 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : x = 180 y = 360 Slip : x = 160 y = 144 ation : x = 160 y = 144 [Function] Sets the horizontal direction basic calculated pitch to approximately 25.4/x mm [(1/x inches], and the vertical direction basic calculated pitch to approximately 25.4/y mm [(1/y) inches]. When x = 0, the horizontal direction basic calculated pitch returns to the default value. When y = 0, the vertical direction basic calculated pitch returns to the default value. [Details] The horizontal direction indicates a direction perpendicular to the paper feeding direction; the vertical direction indicates the paper feeding direction. The basic calculated pitches in the horizontal and vertical directions are the minimum pitch used in calculating the related command values. In standard mode, use the following parameters regardless of the direction of the characters (upside-down, 90º rotation, etc.). a. Commands that use x: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC \, FS S, GS L, GS W b. Commands that use y: ESC 3, ESC J, GS V, ESC K In page mode, use the following parameters according to the direction of the characters. a. When character print direction is selected (ESC T) in page mode, and the starting point is upper left or bottom right (paper feed and expanded characters in the vertical direction) Commands that use x: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC W, ESC \, FS S Commands that use y: ESC 3, ESC J, ESC W, GS $, GS \, GS V, ESC K b. When ESC T (select character print direction in page mode) is upper right or bottom left (expanded characters in the paper feed direction) Commands that use x: ESC 3, ESC J, ESC W, GS $, GS \, ESC K Commands that use y: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC W, ESC \, FS S, GS V This command sets the basic calculated pitch of the set sheet selected by ESC c 1. The basic calculated pitch can be set independently for each set sheet. Slip and validation settings are shared. Therefore, selection of the sheet for command settings for the settings of the basic calculated pitch affect printing on both slips and validation. The initial value of the horizontal direction for thermal, is 1 dot at 1 pitch; for the vertical direction, it is 1 dot at 1/2 pitch. The initial value of slip/validation is 1 dot at 1/2 pitch for both horizontal and perpendicular directions. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. If the calculated result combined with other commands is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. The set values already set are not affected by this command. 3-138

<Thermal> [STAR] To improve differences of distance calculations generated by the differences in print density in equipped print heads (STAR = 203 DPI/EPSON = 180 DPI), STAR printers have basic calculated pitch correction in the DIP switches. By setting to 203 DPI, this corrects the value to calculate using the basic calculated pitches such as the absolute position movement (ESC $) and left margin (GS L) to enable the same pseudo-distance movement as an EPSON printer. However, the basic calculated pitch correction cannot correct data of the fonts or bit images. DIP Switch Settings: Basic Calculated Pitch Correction ON = 203DPI (Default) OFF = 180DPI The basic calculated pitch correction when the left margin is specified Basic Calculated Pitch: X Y Left margin specification value: nl nh (1) When the basic calculated pitch correction selects 203 DPI Left margin = (nl + nh 256 ) 2032 / X / 10 (The decimal place is omitted.) (2) When the basic calculated pitch correction selects 180 DPI Left margin = (nl + nh 256 ) 180 / X (The decimal place is omitted.) [Reference] ESC SP, ESC $, ESC 3, ESC J, ESC W, ESC \, GS $, GS L, GS V, GS W, GS \, ESC c 1 3-139

ESC p m t1 t2 [Name] Specify pulse [Code] ASCII ESC p m t1 t2 Hexadecimal 1B 70 m t1 t2 Decimal 27 112 m t1 t2 [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 m 1, 48 m 49 0 t1 255 0 t2 255 Slip : 0 m 1, 48 m 49 0 t1 255 0 t2 255 ation : 0 m 1, 48 m 49 0 t1 255 0 t2 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Outputs the signal specified by t1, t2 for the connector pin specified by m. m Connector Pin 0, 48 Drawer kick connector #2 pin 1, 49 Drawer kick connector #5 pin The drawer kick on time is t1 x 2 msec; off time is t2 x 2 msec. [Details] Set the OFF time to be longer than the ON time. (t1 < t2) ON OFF t1 t2 For t1 > t2, the value of t2 is processed as t2 = t1. [Reference] DLE DC4 3-140

GS ( A pl ph n m [Name] Run a test print [Code] ASCII GS ( A pl ph n m Hexadecimal 1D 28 41 pl ph n m Decimal 29 40 65 pl ph n m [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256 ) = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) When 0 n 2, 48 n 50: 1 m 3, 49 m 51 When n = 3, 51: m = 2, 3, 50, 51 When n = 4, 52: m = 3, 51 Slip : pl + (ph 256) = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) When 0 n 2, 48 n 50: 1 m 3, 49 m 51 When n = 3, 51: m = 2, 3, 50, 51 When n = 4, 52: m = 3, 51 ation : pl + (ph 256) = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) When 0 n 2, 48 n 50: 1 m 3, 49 m 51 When = 3, 51: m = 2, 3, 50, 51 When n = 4, 52: m = 3, 51 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Executes a test print on the specified paper. pl, ph specify the subsequent parameters as pl + (ph 256) bytes. n specifies the paper targeted for test printing shown in the following table. n Type of Paper 0, 48 Basic Sheet (Thermal) 1, 49 Thermal 2, 50 3, 51 Slip 4, 52 ation m specifies the type of paper targeted for test printing shown in the following table. m Type of Test Print 1, 49 Hexadecimal Dump 2, 50 Self-test Print 3, 51 Rolling Pattern Print [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid only when processed at the top of the line. Because it is not possible to include this command in the macro definition, do not use this command in macro definition. When this command is processed during macro definition, the macro definition is canceled and processing of this command is started. When cut paper is selected, and this command is executed, cut paper is canceled. When this command is executed and cut paper is selected as the test print paper, the printer waits for paper to be inserted. After processing of the command, reset the printer. The printer enters a state that is the same as when the power is turned on when this command is executed. Therefore, the download characters, download bit images and macro are undefined, the reception and print buffers are cleared and the settings are returned to default. After checking a complete reset, send the command and data. When the hexadecimal dump has been specified, the printer prints (*** Hex Dump Printing ***). After printing, send the command and data. The following restrictions apply when executing self-print (m = 2, 50) and rolling pattern print (m = 3, 51). Do not execute a real-time command. While ASB is valid, the ASB status is not sent. When m = 2, 50, or m = 3, 51, the printer becomes BUSY when this command is processed. 3-141

Note The selectable paper is thermal, slip, or validation. When slip or validation is specified as the paper type and a hexadecimal dump is specified, ignore this command. When validation is specified as the paper type and a self-print is specified, ignore this command. [Reference] ESC f, DLE ENQ 3 3-142

GS ( D pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] [Name] ate/invalidate real-time commands [Code] ASCII GS ( D pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] Hexadecimal 1D 28 44 pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] Decimal 29 40 68 pl ph m [a1 b1]... [ak bk] [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-143

GS ( H pl ph fn n <Function 64> [Name] Enable/disable transmission of paper status [Code] ASCII GS ( H pl ph fn n Hexadecimal 1D 28 48 02 00 40 n Decimal 29 40 72 2 0 64 n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256 ) = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) fn = 64 m = 0, 1, 48, 49 Slip : pl + (ph 256 ) = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) fn = 64 m = 0, 1, 48, 49 ation : pl + (ph 256 ) = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) fn = 64 m = 0, 1, 48, 49 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] ates, and invalidates the status to notify that the cut paper was erroneously removed. n Function 0, 48 Invalidates transmission of paper status 1, 49 ates transmission of paper status When paper status transmission is set to valid using n = 1, 49, a status is sent when there is a notice that cut paper has been erroneously removed. [Details] When paper status transmission is set to valid or invalid using this function, check whether unsent paper status data remains in the printer. When using a serial interface, use this command when the printer is READY. When using a parallel interface, shift the printer to reverse mode and check whether the paper state is notified. Paper status notification is compose of the following [header to NUL]. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 4EH 78 1Byte Paper Type * 1 30H/32H 48/50 1Byte Status Type 30H 48 1Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte *1. The following shows the paper status notification. Hex Decimal 9. Information 30H 48 Information related to slip paper 32H 50 Information related to check paper When slip paper is selected as the active paper, when the cut paper is removed, the cut paper status (GS r 3) or cut paper remaining dot count status (GS r 80) become 0 dots for the remaining print region. When setting the paper status notification to valid using this function, always check whether there is a paper status notification from the printer. See the following page for precautions relating to paper status notification transmissions. Note When paper status notification is set to valid (n = 1, 49), the operator can detect when cut paper has been removed. In that case, it is possible to detect removal of the paper after slip paper or check paper is inserted, until the following occurs. However, depending on the setting position of the paper, there might be inconsistency of the removal of the sheet and the notification of the paper status. When discharging paper When a recoverable or non-recoverable error occurs For the following operations, it is possible that the removal of cut paper is detected. Be careful of the following when using related commands. When slip is selected as the active sheet, and the paper is reverse-fed to a position where it is not detected by the TOF sensor using ESC K or ESC e. 3-144

When the removal of paper is detected during printing, printing is stopped at that point. When there is unprinted data in the printer, the printer waits for paper to be inserted. Precautions for sending response data or statuses When sending response data or statuses, if the host PC is not ready for reception, the transmission data will be saved in the printer and the next data will be processed. Saved transmission data is processed when the data of the next time is sent. When using a serial interface, even when any response data or statuses are specified, the host PC should be ready to securely receive data. When the host PC is not ready to receive data, it is not possible to correctly receive transmission data. When using a parallel interface, data sent by this function ([header to NUL] block) is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer of the printer in the same way as other data. When the host PC enters reverse mode, data is sent from the top of the transmission buffer in order. When the amount of data exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer, data is erased. When using this command, it is important to set operations so that the host PC immediately enters a reverse mode and quickly processes the status transmission. When using the Xon/Xoff mode communications of the serial interface, it is possible to use Xoff in a data string of [header to NUL]. Transmission information of each function can be identified as other transmission data by specific data (identifier) of the transmission data string. When the header sent by the printer is [Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55], data up to NUL [Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0] is handled as one group, and identified by corresponding to the combination of the header and identifier. [Reference] GS r, ESC K, ESC e 3-145

GS E n [Name] Set printing speed [Code] ASCII GS E n Hexadecimal 1D 45 n Decimal 29 69 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : ation : [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : ation : <Thermal> [Function] Sets print speed. Bit Status 0 1 7 Undefined - - 6 Undefined - - 5 Print Speed See table below 4 Print Speed See table below 3 Undefined - - 2 Undefined - - 1 Undefined - - 0 Undefined - - Print Speed Bit 5 Bit 4 Print Speed 0 0 High speed 0 1 Mid-speed 1 0 Slow speed 1 1 Undefined [Details] This command is valid only in standard mode. This command is valid only at the top of the line. This command is ignored when page mode is selected. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-146

GS I n [Name] Transmission of Printer ID [Code] ASCII GS I n Hexadecimal 1D 49 n Decimal 29 73 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 3, 49 n 51 Slip : 1 n 3, 49 n 51 ation : 1 n 3, 49 n 51 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sends the specified printer ID. n Printer ID Type Specifications 1, 49 Model ID Hex:24H/Decimal:36 (TM-H6000III) 2, 50 Type ID (See table below) 3, 51 Version ID Depends on the F/W Version <Type ID> Bit Function 0 1 7 Fixed at 0 - - 6 Undefined - - 5 Undefined - - 4 Fixed at 0 - - 3 MICR Reader None Yes 2 Undefined - - 1 Auto-cutter None Yes 0 Supports 2-byte codes None Yes [Details] When using this command, observe the following rules. When the host PC sends this data, the printer returns the status to the host PC. After this command is sent, do not send the next command until the corresponding printer ID is received. When using a serial interface, configure operations for the host PC to use the printer only while the printer is in the READY state. When using a parallel interface, the printer ID sent from the printer is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer in the same way as other transmission data (excluding ASB). When the host PC enters reverse mode, data is sent from the top of the transmission buffer in order. The data that exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer is erased. When using this command, the host PC should immediately enter the reverse mode. Note The printer ID (1 n 3, 49 n 51) is composed by 1 byte. Differs according to the printer model ID (n = 1, 49). The version ID (n = 3, 51) is the same as the firmware version. If the ASB is valid by enabling/disabling automatic status (GS a), it is necessary to identify the printer ID and the ASB status using this command. See Appendix 2 for details on an identification method. [Reference] Appendix 2 3-147

GS g 0 m nl nh [Name] Initialize maintenance counter [Code] ASCII GS g 0 m nl nh Hexadecimal 1D 67 30 m nl nh Decimal 29 103 48 m nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 6 bytes ignored GS g 2 m nl nh [Name] Send maintenance counter [Code] ASCII GS g 2 m nl nh Hexadecimal 1D 67 32 m nl nh Decimal 29 103 50 m nl nh [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 6 bytes ignored 3-148

GS ( K pl ph n m [Name] Set print density [Code] ASCII GS ( K pl ph n m Hexadecimal 1D 28 4B pl ph n m Decimal 29 40 75 pl ph n m [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256) = 2 (pl = 2, ph = 0) n = 49 250 m 255, 0 m 6 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : m = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets print density. m Print Density 250 0.7 251 0.7 252 0.8 253 0.8 254 0.9 255 0.9 0 1.0 1 1.1 2 1.1 3 1.2 4 1.2 5 1.3 6 1.3 [STAR] STAR Mode Commands After printing is stopped, this command changes the print density setting. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is possible. after switch to thermal 3-149

3-3-15) Kanji Control Commands Kanji control commands are ignored on single-byte specification models. All Kanji character control commands are ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. FS & [Name] Specify Kanji character mode [Code] ASCII FS & Hexadecimal 1C 26 Decimal 28 38 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Specifies Kanji mode. [Details] [STAR] This command is valid only on printers bound for Japan, China and Taiwan. This setting is valid until FS., or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. The Kanji code is processed in order of first byte, then second byte. Japanese Kanji Specifications Specification of a Kanji code using this command is valid only when a JIS code type is selected. When the JIS Kanji mode is specified, character codes are all processed as 2-byte Kanji codes. The Kanji mode is set to be invalid in the default setting. The Kanji code type can be selected using FS C. Chinese Kanji Specifications/Taiwan Kanji Specifications If the Kanji mode is specified, the continuing 1 byte is processed as the second byte of the Kanji code when processing a character code equivalent to the first byte of the Kanji code. Therefore, when a Kanji code is specified, it is not possible to print an ASCII character code equivalent to the first byte of the Kanji code. The Kanji mode is specified in the default setting. This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. The following shows the defined area of the 2-byte codes. Specifications Defined Area Upper Byte Lower Byte Japanese Kanji/JIS Code Type 0x21 to 0x7E 0x21 to 0x7E Japanese Kanji/SHIFT JIS Code Type 0x81 to 0x9F 0xE0 to 0xEF 0xFA to 0xFC 0x40 to 0xFE 0x40 to 0x9E Chinese Kanji 0xA1 to 0xFD 0xA1 to FE (*) Taiwanese Kanji 0xA1 to 0xFD 0x40 to FE (*) Bit 7 of the lower bytes of Chinese Kanji are always processed as MASK (0xA1A1 0xA121). It is possible to apply emphasized Kanji (ESC E) and white/black inversion (GS B) using the ANK adornment command. However, if Kanji are expanded 3x, or rotated to the right 90º (ESC V), the emphasizing of Kanji is ignored. <Slip>, <ation> Only the setting is valid in page mode. It is valid after switching to double-density page mode or standard mode. 0xFA40 to 0xFCFE are two-byte spaces. [Reference] FS., FS C, ESC @ 3-150

[Japanese Kanji Installed] <Command Ignored> FS C n(n=0) ANK Characters (Font -A/Font-B) FS & FS C n(n=1) FS FS C n(n=0) JIS Code System <Command Ignored> FS C n(n=0) FS & FS C n(n=1) SHIFT-JIS Code System <Command Ignored> FS C n(n=1) FS & FS. [Chinese Kanji Installed] ANK Characters (Font-A/Font-B) <Command Ignored> FS C n(n=0 / n=1) FS & FS. Chinese Kanji <Command Ignored> FS C n(n=0 / n=1) [Taiwanese Kanji Installed] ANK Characters (Font-A/Font-B) <Command Ignored> FS Cn(n=0/n=1) FS & FS. Taiwanese Kanji <Command Ignored> FS Cn(n=0/n=1) 3-151

FS. [Name] Cancel Kanji character mode [Code] ASCII FS. Hexadecimal 1C 2E Decimal 28 46 [Defined Thermal : - Area] ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Cancels the Kanji mode. [Details] [STAR] This command is valid only on printers bound for Japan, China and Taiwan. This setting is valid until FS &, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Canceling the Kanji code using this command is valid only when a JIS code type is selected. When the JIS Kanji code is canceled, character codes are all processed as 1-byte ASCII codes. The Kanji mode is set to be invalid in the default setting. Chinese Kanji Specifications/Taiwan Kanji Specifications When the JIS Kanji code is canceled, character codes are all processed as 1-byte ASCII codes. The Kanji mode is specified in the default setting. This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. [Reference] FS &, FS C, ESC @ 3-152

FS C n [Name] Select Kanji character font [Code] ASCII FS C n Hexadecimal 1C 43 n Decimal 28 67 n [Defined Area] Thermal : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 Slip : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 ation : n = 0, 1, 48, 49 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Selects Kanji character font. n Selection 0, 48 JIS Code Font 1, 49 Shift JIS Code Font [Details] [STAR] This command is enabled only for Japanese Kanji. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Selects the JIS code font, and enables printing of Kanji when Kanji mode is specified using FS &. If the Shift JIS Kanji mode is specified, the continuing 1 byte is processed as the second byte of the Kanji code when processing a character code equivalent to the first byte of the Kanji code. Therefore, when a Kanji code is selected, it is not possible to print an ASCII character code equivalent to the first byte of the Kanji code. The Kanji code is processed in order of first byte, then second byte. The valid Kanji codes when using the JIS code type are shown below. First Byte: <21>H to <7E>H Second Byte: <21>H to <7E>H The valid Kanji codes when using the Shift JIS code type are shown below. First Byte: <81>H to <9F>H, <E0>H to <EF>H and <FA>H to <FC>H Second Byte: <40>H to <7E>H, and <80>H to <FC>H This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. 0xFA40 to 0xFAFE are two-byte spaces. [Reference] FS &, ESC @ 3-153

FS S n1 n2 [Name] Set Kanji character space amount [Code] ASCII FS S n1 n2 Hexadecimal 1C 53 n1 n2 Decimal 28 83 n1 n2 [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n1 255 0 n2 255 Slip : 0 n1 255 0 n2 255 ation : 0 n1 255 0 n2 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n1 = 0, n2 = 0 Slip : n1 = 0, n2 = 2 ation : n1 = 0, n2 = 2 [Function] Set Kanji character right and left space amounts. Left space amount: n1 x (Basic Calculated Pitch) Right space amount: n2 x (Basic Calculated Pitch) [Details] [STAR] This setting is valid for Kanji and Kanji download characters. The space amounts set using this command are set to the size of standard character sizes. When the horizontal direction magnification expands the characters more than 2x, the space amount is [setting amount x horizontal direction magnification]. In standard mode, uses the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. In page mode, basic calculated pitch used by the beginning point are as outlined below. a. If the beginning point is specified to be the upper left or lower right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (x) of the horizontal direction. b. If the beginning point is specified to be the lower left or upper right by the selection of the character print direction (ESC T) in page mode, use the basic calculated pitch (y) of the vertical direction. Basic calculated pitch is set by GS P. Space amounts can be set independently for both standard mode and page mode. When set in standard mode, this is set to print Kanji in standard mode, and when set in page mode, it is set to print Kanji in page mode. Settings for standard mode/page mode are shared by each station. The set space amount will not change even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after the Kanji space amount is set. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This command is used to change the spaces between Kanji. If the calculated results is a fraction, that is corrected to the minimum mechanical pitch and excess is discarded. Settings that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to the maximum value. This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. <Thermal> Maximum value of the left and right spaces of the Kanji are approx. 35.983mm (255/180 inches). <Slip>, <ation> The space amount set by this command is in half-dot units. The maximum values of the left and right spaces are approximately 40.481 mm (255/160 inches) when standard mode or page mode is selected (when the starting point is set to upper left or lower right). When in page mode, they are 44.979 mm (255/144 inches) (when the starting point is set to lower left or upper right). [Reference] GS P, ESC T 3-154

FS! n [Name] Batch specify Kanji character print mode [Code] ASCII FS! n Hexadecimal 1C 21 n Decimal 28 33 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Batch specify Kanji print mode. [Details] Bit Function 0 1 7 Underline Invalid 6 Undefined - - 5 Undefined - - 4 Undefined - - 3 Double-tall expanded Invalid 2 Double-wide expanded Invalid 1 Undefined - - 0 Undefined - - This setting is valid for Kanji and Kanji download characters. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. Also, valid until the following commands are executed. Bits 2, 3 (Character size): FS W, GS! Bit 7 (Underline mode): FS - When double-wide (bit 2 = 1) is specified, the left edge of the character used as a reference for expansion. Character size is double-high and double-wide when vertical expansion (Bit 3 = 1) and horizontal expansion (Bit 2 = 1) are both specified. In standard mode, when double-high is specified (expanded in the print direction), it is expanded in the paper feed direction. When double-wide is specified, it is expanded in the vertical direction with regard to the paper feed direction. However, when 90º rotation is valid, the relationship of double-high/double-wide is reversed. In page mode, double-high/double-wide are handled as they are. Regardless of the characters, the thickness of the underline is that specified by the underline specification command (FS ). The color of the underline is the same color as the characters. The print color is specified by GS ( N. Kanji underlines are added to the entire width of the characters including the left and right space amounts (FS S) of the character. However, underlines are not added to portions skipped by 90º rotated characters (ESC V), white/black inverted characters (GS B), horizontal tab (HT), absolute position movement (ESC $), and relative position movement (ESC \). This setting is valid for all stations and modes. <Thermal> If characters with different vertical direction magnifications are used in the same line, they are aligned to the character base line. <Slip>, <ation> No base line. If characters with different vertical direction magnifications are used in the same line, they are aligned to the bottom of the characters. Setting valid only when page mode. after switching to double-density page mode or standard mode. [STAR] This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. [Reference] FS -, FS W, GS!, ESC @, FS S, ESC V, GS B, HT, ESC $, ESC \ 3-155

FS n [Name] Specifies/cancels underlining of Kanji [Code] ASCII FS - n Hexadecimal 1C 2D n Decimal 28 45 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 Slip : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 ation : 0 n 2, 48 n 50 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels Kanji underlines. n Function (Thermal) Function (Slip, ation) 0, 48 Cancels Kanji Underline Cancels Kanji Underline 1, 49 1-dot width underlines setting and Kanji underline specification Specifies Kanji Underline 2, 50 2-dot width underlines setting and Kanji underline specification Specifies Kanji Underline [Details] This setting is valid for Kanji and Kanji download characters. The color of the underline is the same color as the characters. The print color is specified by GS ( N. Kanji underlines are added to the entire width of the characters including the left and right space amounts (FS S) of the character. However, underlines are not added to portions skipped by 90º rotated characters (ESC V), white/black inverted characters (GS B), horizontal tab (HT), absolute position movement (ESC $), and relative position movement (ESC \). Regardless of the character size, underline width is constant with the specified thickness. When Kanji underlining is canceled using n = 0, Kanji underlines are not added to subsequent data, but the underline width maintains the previous setting. This setting is valid until FS!, or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. This setting is valid for all stations and modes. [STAR] This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. <Thermal> Kanji underlines are applied to the following positions. 1-dot-width underline: 24 th dot 2-dot-width underline: 23 rd + 24 th dots <Slip>, <ation> Underlines are applied to the 9 th dot of the character. [Reference] FS!, GS!, ESC @, FS S, ESC V, GS B, HT, ESC $, ESC \ 3-156

FS W n [Name] Specifies/cancels double-tall, double wide Kanji characters [Code] ASCII FS W n Hexadecimal 1C 57 n Decimal 28 87 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 255 Slip : 0 n 255 ation : 0 n 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 Slip : n = 0 ation : n = 0 [Function] Specifies or cancels double-high, double-wide Kanji. When n = <*******0>B: Cancels double-high, double-wide printing. When n = <*******1>B: Specifies double-high, double-wide printing. [Details] This setting is valid for Kanji and Kanji download characters. When double-wide is specified, the character is expanded to the right using the left edge as its axis. This setting is valid until FS!, GS! or ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. <Thermal> When double-high is specified, the character is expanded upward and downward using the character base line as its axis. If characters with different vertical direction magnifications are used in the same line, they are aligned to the character base line. <Slip>, <ation> No base line. When double-high is specified, the character is expanded upward using the character bottom edge as its axis. If characters with different vertical direction magnifications are used in the same line, they are aligned to the bottom of the characters. [STAR] This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. [Reference] FS!, GS! 3-157

FS 2 c1 c2 d1...dk [Name] Define external characters [Code] ASCII FS 2 c1 c2 d1... dk Hexadecimal 1C 32 c1 c2 d1... dk Decimal 28 50 c1 c2 d1... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : Japanese Language Kanji Specifications (JIS): c1 = 77H, 21H c2 7EH Japanese Language Kanji Specifications (Shift-JIS): c1 = ECH, 40H c2 7EH 80H c2 9EH Chinese Language Kanji Specifications: c1 = FEH, A1H c2 FEH Taiwanese Kanji Specifications : c1 = FEH, A1H c2 FEH Slip : Japanese Language Kanji Specifications (JIS): c1 = 77H, 21H c2 7EH Japanese Language Kanji Specifications (Shift-JIS): c1 = ECH, 40H c2 7EH 80H c2 9EH Chinese Language Kanji Specifications: c1 = FEH, A1H c2 FEH Taiwanese Kanji Specifications : c1 = FEH, A1H c2 FEH ation : Japanese Language Kanji Specifications (JIS): c1 = 77H, 21H c2 7EH Japanese Language Kanji Specifications (Shift-JIS): c1 = ECH, 40H c2 7EH 80H c2 9EH Chinese Language Kanji Specifications: c1 = FEH, A1H c2 FEH Taiwanese Kanji Specifications: c1 = FEH, A1H c2 FEH [Initial Value] Thermal : All spaces Slip : All spaces ation : All spaces [Function] Defines the Kanji external pattern to character codes specified by c1, c2. c1 specifies the first byte of Kanji code the defines that external character. c2 specifies the second byte of Kanji code that defines the external character. d specifies the defined data (column format). [Details] [STAR] This command is valid only on printers bound for Japan, China and Taiwan. The printer defines according to the data of k bytes of d1 dk. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0. Because the number of dots of the head is different for thermal and slip/validation, the Kanji download characters are defined to the set sheet selected by ESC c 1. Thermal, Slip, ation can each be defined independently. Registered data is shared by slip and validation. Definable character count is 94. This setting is valid until the command is redefined, ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. In default, download characters are not defined. The following page shows the relationship defined data has with the print results. It is possible to define Kanji downloads to all characters in the defined area. Characters once defined can be defined again. This command is ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single-byte countries) by the memory switch. Use the same region for external character registration of JIS and Shift-JIS codes for Japanese Kanji. [Reference] FS C, ESC c 1 3-158

<Thermal> The defined data size for one character is 72 bytes (vertical 3 bytes x 24). [Ex.:] When defining the Kanji [ji] to JIS code <7721>H. d1 24 dots d4 d70 24 dots d2 d5 d71 d3 d6 d72 7 MSB 6 5 4 3 2 1 LSB d1 = <00>H d4 = <03>H d7 = <0F>H d10 = <0D>H d13 = <0C>H d16 = <0D>H d2 = <00>H d5 = <0C>H d8 = <0C>H d11 = <80>H d14 = <03>H d17 = <83>H d3 = <00>H d6 = <00>H d9 = <00>H d12 = <00>H d15 = <00>H d18 = <80>H 3-159

<Slip>, <ation> The defined data size for one character is 32 bytes (vertical 2 bytes x 16 dots). Dots continuously adjacent in the horizontal direction cannot be printed. [Ex.:] When defining the Kanji [ji] to JIS code <7721>H. 16 Dots MSB d1 d3 d31 16 Dots LSB d2 d4 d32 FS 2 c1 c2 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d12 d13 d14 Code (Hexadecimal) 1C 32 77 21 00 00 38 20 20 20 20 20 24 20 24 20 24 21 d16 d17 d18 d19 d20 d21 d22 d23 d24 d25 d26 d27 d28 d29 d30 d31 d32 24 E4 FF 24 20 25 20 26 20 24 20 20 20 20 20 38 20 3-160

3-3-16) PDF417 Commands GS ( k <Function 065> [Name] Set PDF417 symbol position count (level length) [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn n Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 03 00 30 41 n Decimal 29 40 107 3 0 48 65 n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256 ) = 3 (pl = 3, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 65 0 n 30 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets PDF417 symbol position count (level length) When n = 0, sets the automatic process. When n 0, sets the number of positions of the symbol data region to n code words. [Details] The setting of this function affects processes of Functions 081 and 082. When automatic processing is specified (n = 0), the maximum row number in the data region is 30. The following data is not included in the number of positions. Start patterns and stop patterns Indicator code words of the right and left levels. The number of positions when automatic processing is specified (n = 0), calculates the number of code words based on the current print region, when processing Functions 081, and 082, module width (Function 067), and the option settings (Function 070). This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, 067, 070, ESC @ 3-161

GS ( k <Function 066> [Name] Set PDF417 number of symbol levels [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn n Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 03 00 30 42 n Decimal 29 40 107 3 0 48 66 n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256 ) = 3 (pl = 3, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 66 n = 0, 3 n 90 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets the number of levels of the PDF417 symbols. When n = 0, specifies the automatic process. When n 0, specifies the number of positions of symbols to n levels. [Details] The setting of this function affects processes of Functions 081 and 082. When automatic processing is specified (n = 0), the maximum number of levels is 90. The number of levels when automatic processing is specified (n = 0), is calculated based on the current print region, when processing Functions 081, and 082, module height (Function 068). This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, 068, ESC @ 3-162

GS ( k <Function 067> [Name] Set PDF417 module width [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn n Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 03 00 30 43 n Decimal 29 40 107 3 0 48 67 n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256 ) = 3 (pl = 3, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 67 2 n 8 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 3 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets one PDF417 symbol module width to n dots. [Details] The setting of this function affects processes of Functions 081 and 082. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. [Note] Set in units of 1 dot. The width is set in 0.125 mm (1/203 inches) units. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, ESC @ 3-163

GS ( k <Function 068> [Name] Set the PDF417 symbol level height [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn n Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 03 00 30 44 n Decimal 29 40 107 3 0 48 68 n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256) = 3 (pl = 3, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 68 2 n 8 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 3 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets one PDF417 symbol module height to [module width x n]. [Details] The setting of this function affects processes of Functions 081 and 082. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. [Note] The height of one level affects the reading rate of symbols. The height of one level is recommended to be set to 3 to 5 times the module width. When the symbol vertical size is less than 5 mm (0.2 inches), there is the possibility that the reading rate will drop. It is possible to check the vertical size of the symbol using the size information status of Function 082. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, ESC @ 3-164

GS ( k <Function 069> [Name] Set the PDF417 symbol error correction level [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn m n Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 04 00 30 45 m n Decimal 29 40 107 4 0 48 69 m n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256) = 4 (pl = 4, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 69 m = 48, 49 48 n 56 (When m = 48) 1 n 40 (When m = 49) ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : m = 49, n = 1 (Raito : 10%) ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sets the PDF417 symbol error correction level. m Function 48 Sets the error correction level to level. 49 Sets the error correction level to ratio. The ratio is [n x 10%]. [Details] The setting of this function affects processes of Functions 081 and 082. Sets the error correction level to either level or ratio. The error correction levels specified by level (m = 48) are shown below. The number of error correction code words is fixed regardless of the number of code words of the data region. n Function Error Correction Code Word Count 48 Selects error correction level 0. 2 49 Selects error correction level 1. 4 50 Selects error correction level 2. 8 51 Selects error correction level 3. 16 52 Selects error correction level 4. 32 53 Selects error correction level 5. 64 54 Selects error correction level 6. 128 55 Selects error correction level 7. 256 56 Selects error correction level 8. 512 The error correction levels specified by ratio (m = 49) are shown below. The error correction level is defined by the value [data code word count x n x 0.1 = A] that was calculated. The number of error correction code words varies proportionally to the number of code words of the data region. Calculated Result (A) Function Error Correction Code Word Count 0 to 3 Selects error correction level 1. 4 4 to 10 Selects error correction level 2. 8 11 to 20 Selects error correction level 3. 16 21 to 45 Selects error correction level 4. 32 46 to 100 Selects error correction level 5. 64 101 to 200 Selects error correction level 6. 128 201 to 400 Selects error correction level 7. 256 More than 401 Selects error correction level 8. 512 Error correction code words calculated by the coefficient 929. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. 3-165

<Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, ESC @ 3-166

GS ( k <Function 070> [Name] Set PDF417 number options [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn n Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 03 00 30 46 n Decimal 29 40 107 3 0 48 70 n [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256) = 3 (pl = 3, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 70 n = 0, 1 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Specifies and cancels the PDF417 symbol options. m Function 0 Cancels the simple PDF417 symbol options. 1 Specifies the simple PDF417 symbol options. [Details] The setting of this function affects processes of Functions 081 and 082. This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, ESC @ 3-167

GS ( k <Function 080> [Name] Sets the symbol data of PDF417 symbols (stores data in the symbol saving region) [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn m d1... dk Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B pl ph 30 50 30 d1... dk Decimal 29 40 107 pl ph 48 80 48 d1... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : 4 pl + (ph 256) 1027 (0 pl 255, 0 ph 4) cn = 48 fn = 80 m = 48 0 d 255 k = (pl + ph 256) - 3 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Stores the symbol data of PDF417 symbols (d1 dk) in the symbol saving region. [Details] Data stored in the symbol saving region using this function is processed using Function 081 and 082. After processing Functions 081 and 082, data of the saving region is maintained. k bytes of d1 dk are processed as symbol data. This function specifies only the data word count of the symbol. The printer automatically applies this so the following data is not included in the d1 dk data. Start patterns and stop patterns Indicator code words of the right and left levels. Descriptor related to symbol length (initial code word of the data region) Error correction code words calculated by the coefficient 929. This setting is valid until this function is reset, ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is off. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, ESC @ 3-168

GS ( k <Function 081> [Name] Print symbol data of the PDF417 symbol saving region [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn m Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 03 00 30 51 m Decimal 29 40 107 3 0 48 81 m [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256) = 3 (pl = 3, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 81 m = 48 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Encodes and prints PDF417 symbol data stored in the symbol saving region. [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid when the printer status is top of line or no print data. It is not possible to print symbol data that is beyond the print region. If the following errors exist in the data of the symbol saving region, printing is not possible. If there is no data (Function 080 is not processed). When automatic processing is specified for the numbers of positions and levels: [(number of positions x number of levels) < number of code words] When the number of code words in the data region is more than 928. The following data is automatically added by the encoding process. Start patterns and stop patterns Indicator code words of the right and left levels. Descriptor related to symbol length (initial code word of the data region) Error correction code words calculated by the coefficient 929. Pad code words The data region includes the following code words. Data specified by Function 080. Descriptor related to symbol length (initial code word of the data region) Error correction code words calculated by the coefficient 929. Pad code words The number of positions when the automatic process (Function 065) is specified is calculated using the current print region, module width (Function 067), option settings (Function 070), and the code words in the data region. Maximum number of positions is 30. The number of levels specified in page mode when the automatic process (Function 066) is specified is calculated using the current print region, module height (Function 068), and the code words in the data region. Maximum number of levels is 90. The printing of symbols is unaffected by the print mode (emphasized printing, double printing, underline, character size, black/white inverted printing, and 90 right rotation) excluding upside-down printing. Bar code printing is affected by the following command settings. Position alignment (ESC a n) Absolute position movement (ESC $ n1 n2) Relative position movement (ESC \ n1 n2) Print region setting (ESC RS A n) Horizontal tab (HT) Upside-down printing (ESC { n}) When in 2-color print mode, the symbols are printed with the selected color. In standard mode, this command executes a paper feed for the height of the symbol regardless of the initial line feed amount setting (ESC 2), and the line feed amount set by the line feed amount setting (ESC 3). After printing the symbol, the top of the line is set at the next printing position (the printer status is top of line and no print data ). 3-169

When in page mode, symbol data is only expanded to the print buffer, but printing is not executed. After the symbol expansion is ended, the next dot of the final data of the symbol is the next data expansion starting position. The command is not set for the quiet zone (left and right margins). When using this command, always consider the quiet zone. When standard mode is selected, and the horizontal width of the bar code exceeds one line of the print region, the data of the counter is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, and the horizontal width of the symbol exceeds one line of the print region, the bar code is not printed and the data expansion starting position moves to the left edge outside of the print region. Note This command is valid only when thermal is selected as the paper type. <Slip>, <ation> Data after cn is received for pl + (ph x 256) bytes and discarded. [Reference] GS ( k, ESC a, ESC $, ESC \, ESC RS A, HT, ESC {, ESC 2, ESC 3 3-170

GS ( k <Function 082> [Name] Send size information of the symbol data of the PDF417 symbol saving region [Code] ASCII GS ( k pl ph cn fn m Hexadecimal 1D 28 6B 03 00 30 52 m Decimal 29 40 107 3 0 48 82 m [Defined Area] Thermal : pl + (ph 256) = 3 (pl = 3, ph = 0) cn = 48 fn = 82 m = 48 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Sends the size information of the encoded PDF417 symbol data stored in the symbol saving region by GS ( k Function 080. [Details] When standard mode is selected, this command is valid when the printer status is top of line or no print data. Data of the size information is shown below. Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length Header 37H 55 1Byte Identifier 2FH 47 1Byte Horizontal Size *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 5 Bytes Delimiter 1FH 31 1Byte Vertical Size *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 5 Bytes Delimiter 1FH 31 1Byte Fixed Value 31H 49 1Byte Delimiter 1FH 31 1Byte Other Information *2 30H/31H 48/49 1Byte NUL 00H 0 1Byte * 1 The horizontal and vertical sizes are shown as the number symbol dots. The decimal value of the horizontal and vertical sizes are converted to character data and sent in order from the MSB. Ex.: When the horizontal size is 120 dots, 120 is converted to 3 bytes of data (Hex:31H, 32H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48). * 2 Other information indicates whether it is possible to print symbol data stored in the saving region. Hex Decimal Data length 30H 48 Printable 31H 49 Not printable The quiet zone does not include size information. Size information indicates the size of the symbol printed by Function 081. 3-171

When other information is cannot print (Decimal: 49), try using one of the methods listed below to resolve the problem. Cause When in standard mode and there is data in the print buffer The symbol is larger than the current print region. Number of positions x Number of levels < Code Word Count When the number of code words in the data region is greater than 928. Methods Execute GS T, or use LF, CR, ESC J to print and set the printer to having no data in the print buffer. Widen the print region using GS W, ESC W, ESC $. Reduce the module width using Function 067. Reduce the module width using Function 068. Lower the error correction level using Function 069. Increase the number of positions using Function 065. Increase the number of levels using Function 066. Reduce the data using Function 080. Lower the error correction level using Function 069. There is no data in the symbol saving region. Store data in the saving region using Function 080. Note This command can be used only when thermal is selected as the paper type. [Other information] [Hex = 31H/Decimal = 49], and the symbol cannot be printed. Precautions for Sending When using this command, observe the following rules. When the host PC sends this command, the printer sends response data or the status to the PC. The PC does not send any more data until it receives response data or status from the printer. When using a serial interface, configure operations for the host PC to use the printer only while the printer is in the READY state. When using a parallel interface, the block of [header to NUL] is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer of the printer in the same way as other data (excluding ASB). When the host PC enters reverse mode, data is sent from the top of the transmission buffer in order. When the amount of data exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer, data is erased. When using this command, it is important to set operations so that the host PC immediately enters a reverse mode and quickly processes the status transmission. When using the Xon/Xoff mode communications of the serial interface, it is possible to use Xoff in a data string of [header to NUL]. Transmission information of each function can be identified as other transmission data by specific data (identifier) of the transmission data string. When the header sent by the printer is [Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55], data up to NUL [Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0] is handled as one group, and identified by corresponding to the combination of the header and identifier. <Slip>, <ation> Printing not possible. Send (37H, 2FH, 30H, 1FH, 30H, 1FH, 31H, 1FH, 31H, 00H). [Reference] GS ( k Function 081, 082, ESC @ 3-172

3-3-17) User NV Memory Edit Commands GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 <Function 0> [Name] Delete specified record [Code] ASCII GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 Hexadecimal 1D 28 43 05 00 00 fn 00 c1 c2 Decimal 29 40 67 5 0 0 fn 0 c1 c2 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-173

GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 d1...dk <Function 1> [Name] Store data in specified record [Code] ASCII GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 d1... d2 Hexadecimal 1D 28 43 pl ph 00 fn 00 c1 c2 d1... d2 Decimal 29 40 67 pl ph 0 fn 0 c1 c2 d1... d2 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-174

GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 <Function 2> [Name] Send stored data of specified record [Code] ASCII GS ( C pl ph m fn b c1 c2 Hexadecimal 1D 28 43 05 00 00 fn 00 c1 c2 Decimal 29 40 67 5 0 0 fn 0 c1 c2 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-175

GS ( C pl ph m fn b <Function 3> [Name] Sends user NV memory use capacity [Code] ASCII GS ( C pl ph m fn b Hexadecimal 1D 28 43 03 00 00 fn 00 Decimal 29 40 67 3 0 0 fn 0 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-176

GS ( C pl ph m fn b <Function 4> [Name] Send remaining user NV memory use capacity [Code] ASCII GS ( C pl ph m fn b Hexadecimal 1D 28 43 03 00 00 fn 00 Decimal 29 40 67 3 0 0 fn 0 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-177

GS ( C pl ph m fn b <Function 5> [Name] Send key code list of stored record [Code] ASCII GS ( C pl ph m fn b Hexadecimal 1D 28 43 03 00 00 fn 00 Decimal 29 40 67 3 0 0 fn 0 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-178

GS ( C pl ph m fn b d1 d2 d3 <Function 6> [Name] Batch delete all regions of the user NV memory [Code] ASCII GS ( C pl ph m fn b d1 d2 d3 Hexadecimal 1D 28 43 06 00 00 fn 00 d1 d2 d3 Decimal 29 40 67 6 0 0 fn 0 d1 d2 d3 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-179

3-3-18) User Setting Mode Command GS ( E pl ph fn [Name] User setting mode [Code] ASCII GS ( E pl ph fn Hexadecimal 1D 28 45 pl ph fn Decimal 29 40 69 pl ph fn [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-180

3-3-19) Printer Customizing Commands GS ( M pl ph fn m <Function 1> [Name] Save set value of the work region to saving region (Flash) [Code] ASCII GS ( M pl ph fn m Hexadecimal 1D 28 4D 02 00 fn m Decimal 29 40 77 2 0 fn m [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-181

GS ( M pl ph fn m <Function 2> [Name] Load to work region of specified setting value [Code] ASCII GS ( M pl ph fn m Hexadecimal 1D 28 4D 02 00 fn m Decimal 29 40 77 2 0 fn m [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-182

GS ( M pl ph fn m <Function 3> [Name] Select setting value of work region in initializing process [Code] ASCII GS ( M pl ph fn m Hexadecimal 1D 28 4D 02 00 fn m Decimal 29 40 77 2 0 fn m [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] pl + ph x 256 bytes received and discarded. 3-183

3-3-20) STAR Original Commands STAR original commands are not prescribed to the ESC/POS control codes, but are commands for improving functions and prescribed for implementing STAR s original functions. ESC GS = nl nh da1... dak db1... dbk [Name] Write blank code page data [Code] ASCII ESC GS = nl nh da1... dak db1... dbk Hexadecimal 1B 1D 3D nl nh da1... dak db1... dbk Decimal 27 29 61 nl nh da1... dak db1... dbk [Defined Area] Thermal : n1 = 0, n2 = 48 1 (n1 + n2 256) 0 da 255 (Font-A data) 0 db 255 (Font-B data) k = (n1 + n2 256) ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - <Thermal> [Function] Stores blank code page data in the non-volatile memory. [Details] A blank code page indicates a character code table where character codes from 80h to FFh are all blank. A blank code page can be selected using n = 255 of the character code table selection command (ESC t n, ESC GS t n). Data written to the blank code page is shown below. Font-A: 1 character = 48 bytes 6144 bytes = 48 bytes x 128 characters Font-B: 1 character = 48 bytes 6144 bytes = 48 bytes x 128 characters The printer is reset after writing to the non-volatile memory is completed. (Font - A Data Format Vertical 24 dot x Horizontal 12 dot) MSB LSB MSB LSB Da1 Da2 Da3 Da4 Da5 Da6 Da7 Da8 Da9 Da10 Da11 Da12 Da13 Da14 Da15 Da16 Da17 Da18 Da19 Da20 Da21 Da22 Da23 Da24 Da25 Da26 Da27 Da28 Da29 Da30 Da31 Da32 Da33 Da34 Da35 Da36 Da37 Da38 Da39 Da40 Da41 Da42 Da43 Da44 Da45 Da46 Da47 Da48 = Data Region / = Zero Data <Slip>, <ation> Only registration is possible. Registration data is printable after switching to thermal. [Reference] Appendix 3 3-184

ESC GS t n [Name] Select character code table [Code] ASCII ESC GS t n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 74 n Decimal 27 29 116 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 21, 32 n 34, 64 n 79, n = 255 Slip : 0 n 21, 32 n 34, 64 n 79, n = 255 ation : 0 n 21, 32 n 34, 64 n 79, n = 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Specifies code page n Code Page n Code Page 0 Normal 32 Codepage 1252 (Windows Latin-1) 1 CodePage437 (USA, Std. Europe) 33 Codepage 1250 (Windows Latin-2) 2 Katakana 34 Codepage 1251 (Windows Cyrillic) 3 CodePage437 (USA, Std. Europe) 64 Codepage 3840 (IBM-Russian) 4 Codepage 858 (Multilingual) 65 Codepage 3841 (Gost) 5 Codepage 852 (Latin-2) 66 Codepage 3843 (Polish) 6 Codepage 860 (Portuguese) 67 Codepage 3844 (CS2) 7 Codepage 861 (Icelandic) 68 Codepage 3845 (Hungarian) 8 Codepage 863 (Canadian French) 69 Codepage 3846 (Turkish) 9 Codepage 865 (Nordic) 70 Codepage 3847 (Brazil-ABNT) 10 Codepage 866 (Cyrillic Russian) 71 Codepage 3848 (Brazil-ABICOMP) 11 Codepage 855 (Cyrillic Bulgarian) 72 Codepage 1001 (Arabic) 12 Codepage 857 (Turkish) 73 Codepage 2001 (Lithuanian-KBL) 13 Codepage 862 (Israel (Hebrew)) 74 Codepage 3001 (Estonian-1) 14 Codepage 864 (Arabic) 75 Codepage 3002 (Estonian-2) 15 Codepage 737 (Greek) 76 Codepage 3011 (Latvian-1) 16 Codepage 851 (Greek) 77 Codepage 3012 (Latvian-2) 17 Codepage 869 (Greek) 78 Codepage 3021 (Bulgarian) 18 Codepage 928 (Greek) 79 Codepage 3041 (Maltese) 19 Codepage 772 (Lithuanian) 255 Blank page 20 Codepage 774 (Lithuanian) 21 Codepage 874 (Thai) If n is outside the defined range, 4 bytes are ignored. Note The setting using this command is valid for all stations and modes. 3-185

ESC RS F n [Name] Select font [Code] ASCII ESC RS F n Hexadecimal 1B 1E 46 n Decimal 27 30 70 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 1, n = 16 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Selects font n Font 0 Font-A (12 24 dot) 1 Font-B ( 9 24 dot) 16 OCR-B (16 24 dot) When OCR-B font is selected, the following functions are invalid. Code Page Blank Code Pages International Characters Slash zero When using the OCR-B font to read characters using a scanner, cancel adornment, expansion and external character settings. Also, check the OCR-B font by actual use. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-186

ESC RS C n [Name] Select print mode [Code] ASCII ESC RS C n Hexadecimal 1B 1E 43 n Decimal 27 30 67 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 1, 48 n 49 ( 0 n 1 ), n = 16, n = 32 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> n Print Mode Specification 0, 48 Single-color Mode 1, 49 2-color Mode 16 Low Power Consumption Mode 32 Double Resolution Mode This command is ignored when the low-power consumption mode is selected by the DIP switches. The specification of this command is not cleared by ESC @. Prints data in line buffer, if unprinted data exists in the line buffer. This command is processed after quitting the current print. Commands that select the same mode are ignored in the currently selected mode. This command is ignored when page mode is selected. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-187

ESC RS L m [Name] Logo batch control [Code] ASCII ESC RS L m Hexadecimal 1B 1E 4C m Decimal 27 30 76 m [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 m 3, 48 m 51 ( 0 m 3 ), m = 255 Slip : 0 m 3, 48 m 51 ( 0 m 3 ), m = 255 ation : 0 m 3, 48 m 51 ( 0 m 3 ), m = 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Controls logos specified by the parameter m. After execution, resets the printer. m: Print Mode <Slip>, <ation> m Logo Control Mode 0, 48 Normal Mode Batch Printing 1, 49 Horizontal double size mode batch printing 2, 50 Vertical double size mode batch printing 3, 51 Double high/wide mode batch printing 255 Logo batch delete If the parameter is within the defined region, execute this command after printing the unprinted data in the line buffer. (Unprinted data is printed regardless of whether the specified logo was registered by n.) Form feed obeys the vertical print size of the logo. Print modes, excluding upside-down printing (enhanced, double, underline, character size, black/white inverted, and 90 right rotation) are unaffected by logos. Prints logo number as shown below in the line above each logo print. This line is printed with ANK characters, so currently set adornment is applied. (Print Ex.) LOGO No. 1 (Each logo number is printed at the 1 position.) If the logo horizontal print size exceeds the horizontal print region, the portion exceeding the area is not printed. This test print is affected by the following command settings. Left margin (GS L n1 n2) Right margin (GS W n1 n2) Position alignment (ESC a n) Print region setting (ESC RS A n) Upside-down printing (ESC { n) After batch printing output is ended, paper is fed automatically to the cutting position, paper is cut (if the printer is equipped with a cutter), and the printer is reset. When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored [Note] <Thermal> m Mode Vertical Direction Dot Horizontal Direction Density Dot Density 0, 48 Normal mode 203 DPI 203 DPI 1, 49 Double-wide Mode 203 DPI 101 DPI 2, 50 Double-high Mode 101 DPI 203 DPI 3, 51 Double-high, Doublewide Mode 101 DPI 101 DPI m Horizontal Direction Dot Vertical Direction Dot Density (DPI) *1 Density (DPI) Remarks 0, 48 Double density (169.3) Standard density (72) 1, 49 Standard density (84.7) Standard density (72) 2, 50 Double density (169.3) Double density (144) 3, 51 Standard density (84.7) Double density (144) *1: The actual value of the dot pitch in the horizontal direction is 0.30 mm for standard density and 0.15 mm for double density. 3-188

ESC GS + m [t1 nl1 nh1 d11 d12... d1k]1 [t2 nl2 nh2 d21 d22... d2k]2... [tm nlm nhm dm1 dm2... dmk]m [Name] Macro registration [Code] ASCII ESC GS + m t1 nl1 nh1 d11 d12.. d1k Hexadecimal 1B 1D 2B m t1 nl1 nh1 d11 d12.. d1k Decimal 27 29 43 m t1 nl1 nh1 d11 d12.. d1k [Code] ASCII t2 nl2 nh2 d21 d22.. d2k.. tm nlm nhm dm1 dm2.. dmk Hexadecimal t2 nl2 nh2 d21 d22.. d2k.. tm nlm nhm dm1 dm2.. dmk Decimal t2 nl2 nh2 d21 d22.. d2k.. tm nlm nhm dm1 dm2.. dmk [Defined Area] Thermal : m = 1, t = 0, 0 d 255 k = (nl + nh 256 ), 0 k 7936 Slip : m = 1, t = 0, 0 d 255 k = (nl + nh 256 ), 0 k 7936 ation : m = 1, t = 0, 0 d 255 k = (nl + nh 256 ), 0 k 7936 [Initial Value] Thermal : No registration Slip : No registration ation : No registration [Function] This command registers macro data to the following macro registration region. m specifies the number of registration blocks. t specifies the type of registration data. t Registration data type 0 Initialization Macro (nl + nh x 256) specifies the number of data to register. When (nl + nh x 256) = 0, delete macro data specified by t. d is the macro data to register. After writing macro data to the non-volatile memory, execute a printer reset. When the total macro volume exceeds the registration capacity, the data up to the data block that exceeds the capacity is written to the non-volatile memory, and thereafter the command analysis is ended. If there is unprinted data in the line buffer, this command is executed after printing that data. When registering, the current macro region is completely cleared, so rewrite previous macro data if it is needed. When in Hex Dump, data is added to the initialization macro region in the same way as the current specifications. When the following commands are input, operation is not guaranteed. Initialize command (ESC @) Reset command (ESC?) Note Registration data shared by all stations, and modes. 3-189

3-3-20-1) Other STAR Original Commands ESC GS # m N n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL [Name] Memory Switch Settings [Code] ASCII ESC GS # m N n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL Hexadecimal 1B 1D 23 m N n1 n2 n3 n4 0A 00 Decimal 27 29 35 m N n1 n2 n3 n4 10 0 [Defined Area] Thermal : m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64, 75, 76 (m = W, T,,, +, -, @, K, L ) 48 n1 57 ( 0 n1 9 ), 65 n1 70 ( A n1 F ), 97 n1 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n2 57 ( 0 n2 9 ), 65 n2 70 ( A n2 F ), 97 n2 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n3 57 ( 0 n3 9 ), 65 n3 70 ( A n3 F ), 97 n3 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n4 57 ( 0 n4 9 ), 65 n4 70 ( A n4 F ), 97 n4 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 N 57 ( 0 N 9 ), 65 N 72 ( A N H ), 97 N 104 ( a N h ) N = 85 ( U ): User Defined Region Slip : m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64, 75, 76 ( m = W, T,,, +, -, @, K, L ) 48 n1 57 ( 0 n1 9 ), 65 n1 70 ( A n1 F ), 97 n1 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n2 57 ( 0 n2 9 ), 65 n2 70 ( A n2 F ), 97 n2 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n3 57 ( 0 n3 9 ), 65 n3 70 ( A n3 F ), 97 n3 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n4 57 ( 0 n4 9 ), 65 n4 70 ( A n4 F ), 97 n4 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 N 57 ( 0 N 9 ), 65 N 72 ( A N H ), 97 N 104 ( a N h ) N = 85 ( U ): User Defined Region ation : m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64, 75, 76 (m = W, T,,,, +, -, @, K, L ) 48 n1 57 ( 0 n1 9 ), 65 n1 70 ( A n1 F), 97 n1 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n2 57 ( 0 n2 9 ), 65 n2 70 ( A n2 F ), 97 n2 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n3 57 ( 0 n3 9 ), 65 n3 70 ( A n3 F ), 97 n3 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 n4 57 ( 0 n4 9 ), 65 n4 70 ( A n4 F ), 97 n4 102 ( a n1 f ) 48 N 57 ( 0 N 9 ), 65 N 72 ( A N H ), 97 N 104 ( a N h ) N = 85 ( U ) : User Defined Region [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Sends command to write after defining memory switch using the definition command specified by the following classes. Memory switch information defined by the command to write is written to the volatile memory. When writing to the volatile memory by the command to write, the printer executes a reset. By specifying N = 85 ( U ), it is possible to register any 16 bit data by specifying. Function Class m N n1 n2 n3 n4 Definition data write and reset Write W Fixed at 0 Fixed at 0000 Definition data write and reset and test print Write T Fixed at 0 Fixed at 0000 Data Definition (Data Specification) Definition, N n1 n2 n3 n4 Data definition (Set Specified Bit) Definition + N n1 n2 n3 n4 Data definition (Clear Specified Bit) Definition N n1 n2 n3 n4 Data Definition (Initialize All Data) Definition @ Fixed at 0 Fixed at 0000 m: Mode Selection N: Memory switch number to specify n1 n2 n3 n4: Specified data m =, Specified Data m = + Bit number to set m = - Bit number to clear 3-190

<Thermal> When a function is specified that accompanies mis-positioning adjustment (m = K, L ) execute only definition data write and reset, and do not execute mis-positioning adjustment. <ation> When a function is specified that accompanies self-print, and mis-positioning adjustment (m = T, K, L ) execute only definition data write and reset, and do not execute mis-positioning adjustment. 3-191

3-3-20-2) STAR Original Presenter Control Commands The following commands control the presenter functions. Therefore, the following commands are effective only on models equipped with a presenter. ESC SYN 0 n [Name] Execute presenter paper recovery [Code] ASCII ESC SYN 0 n Hexadecimal 1B 16 30 n Decimal 27 22 48 n [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 4 bytes ignored ESC SYN 1 n [Name] Set presenter paper recovery function and automatic recovery time [Code] ASCII ESC SYN 1 n Hexadecimal 1B 16 31 n Decimal 27 22 49 n [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 4 bytes ignored 3-192

ESC SYN 3 n [Name] Acquire presenter paper counter [Code] ASCII ESC SYN 3 n Hexadecimal 1B 16 33 n Decimal 27 22 51 n [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 4 bytes ignored ESC SYN 4 n [Name] Initialize presenter paper counter [Code] ASCII ESC SYN 4 n Hexadecimal 1B 16 34 n Decimal 27 22 52 n [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] 4 bytes ignored 3-193

3-3-20-3) STAR Original Mark Commands This command is specialized to print marking sheets for the lottery. This command can print lines. Print Sample <Print Sample> L O T T E R Y 1 0 01 05 32 85 86 50 70 77 08 50 21 42 46 40 12 02 06 78 Mark Printing 2003/04/08 STAR Micronics co.,. ltd No. 0304081254896 Command Transmission Example Mark Format Mark Height h = 10 dots; Mark Line Feed Amount V = 20 dots Mark number 0: Mark Color c = White; Mark Horizontal Width w = 16 dots Mark number 1: Mark Color c = Black; Mark Horizontal Width w = 40 dots Mark number 2: Mark Color c = White; Mark Horizontal Width w = 40 dots Mark 1 Hor. W Mark 0 Hor. W Mark 2 Hor. W Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 2 Mark height h Mark LF amount v Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 2 Mark 0 Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 1 Mark height h Mark LF amount v Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 2 Mark 0 Mark 2 Mark height h Mark LF amount v Transmission Example (1) Mark Height; Line Feed Amount Setting <ESC><GS> * 1 h v (h = 010, v = 020 ) (2) Color of Each Mark Number, Horizontal Width Setting <ESC> <GS> * 2 m c w (Mark Number 0 Setting: m = 0, c = 0, w = 016 ) <ESC> <GS> * 2 m c w (Mark Number 0 Setting: m = 1, c = 1, w = 040 ) <ESC> <GS> * 2 m c w (Mark Number 0 Setting: m = 2, c = 0, w = 040 ) (3) Register mark format specified in advance by (1) and (2) to the non-volatile memory (It is possible to print marks that are not registered to the non-volatile memory.) <ESC> <GS> * W (4) Print marks <ESC><GS> * 0 n m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 (n = 007, m1 = 1, m2 = 0, m3 = 1, m4 = 0, m5 = 1, m6 = 0, m7 = 2 ) <ESC><GS> * 0 n m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 (n = 007, m1 = 1, m2 = 0, m3 = 2, m4 = 0, m5 = 1, m6 = 0, m7 = 1 ) <ESC><GS> * 0 n m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 (n = 007, m1 = 1, m2 = 0, m3 = 1, m4 = 0, m5 = 2, m6 = 0, m7 = 2 ) 3-194

ESC GS * 0 n m1 m2 m3... mk [Name] Print mark [Code] ASCII ESC GS * 0 n m1 m2 m3... mk Hexadecimal 1B 1D 2A 30 n m1 m2 m3... mk Decimal 27 29 42 48 n m1 m2 m3... mk [Defined Area] Thermal : 001 n 255, 0 m 9, k = n ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Prints mark number specified by m, based on the pre-specified mark format (mark height, mark line feed amount, mark color, and mark horizontal width). n indicates the number of marks to print. When there are 10 marks (m1 to m10), n = 010. m indicates the mark number to print. n, m are ASCII character strings that are expressed in decimal. They are composed of character codes from 0 to 9. This command is ignored if print data exists in the image buffer. Therefore, this cannot exist with other print data (characters, bit images, bar codes). If the specified mark does not fit in the remaining print region, the number of bytes specified by n are received and discarded. When page mode is selected, or n is outside the defined area, the number of bytes specified by n are received and discarded. This command is affected by position alignment, left margin, position movement, position such as horizontal tabs, and upside-down printing. <Slip>, <ation> All data received and discarded. ESC GS * 1 h v [Name] Specify mark height and line feed [Code] ASCII ESC GS * 1 h v Hexadecimal 1B 1D 2A 31 h v Decimal 27 29 42 49 h v [Defined Area] Thermal : 001 h 255, 001 v 255, h v ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : Non-volatile memory ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Specifies mark height and line feed h indicates mark height (number of dots); v indicates mark line feed amount (number of dots). h, v are ASCII character strings that are expressed in decimal. They are composed of character codes from 0 to 9. If a small line feed amount is specified, there is the possibility that intermittent printing could occur, so a setting of v = 16 dots or higher is recommended. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-195

ESC GS * 2 m c w [Name] Specify mark color and horizontal width in each mark number [Code] ASCII ESC GS * 2 m c w Hexadecimal 1B 1D 2A 32 m c w Decimal 27 29 42 50 m c w [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 m 9, 0 c 1, 001 w 999 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : Non-volatile memory ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Specifies mark color and horizontal width in each mark number m indicates the mark number. c indicates the mark color. w indicates the mark horizontal width (number of dots). If w exceeds the currently set print region, this command is ignored. m, c, w are ASCII character strings that are expressed in decimal. They are composed of character codes from 0 to 9. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid c Mark Color 0 (48) White 1 (49) Black <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-196

ESC GS * W [Name] Register mark format to non-volatile memory [Code] ASCII ESC GS * W Hexadecimal 1B 1D 2A 57 Decimal 27 29 42 87 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Registers the mark format (mark height, mark line feed amount, mark color, and mark horizontal width) in non-volatile memory. After registration to the non-volatile memory, execute a printer reset. ESC GS * C [Name] Initialize mark format from non-volatile memory [Code] ASCII ESC GS * C Hexadecimal 1B 1D 2A 43 Decimal 27 29 42 67 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Initializes the mark format (mark height, mark line feed amount, mark color, and mark horizontal width) registered in non-volatile memory. After initialization, resets the printer. Consider the life of the non-volatile memory and avoid over - sue of this command. Initial Value of Mark Format Mark Height: 016 (16 dots) Mark Line Feed Amount: 032 (32 dots) Mark Color: 0 (White All Mark Numbers) Mark Horizontal Width: 080 (80 dots All Mark Numbers) 3-197

3-3-20-4) STAR Original Auto Logo Commands If the portion that was changed was only the product name in a system, like the one below, already operating, this command functions to print a logo like the one below by only changing the product name. This function has two operating modes. 1) Standard Auto Logo Function Preset the Auto Logo function, and execute the following operations with the printing cut command under the existing system as a trigger. (1) Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger. (2) Execute printing if print data exists in the image buffer. (3) Execute user macro 1 (4) Auto Logo Printing (5) Execute user macro 2 By Auto Logo embedding a preset command character / and the logo number 2 to print, in the current print data, logo 2 is printed by the (4) Auto Logo Print. In other words, If CHEESE BURGER / 2 is registered as a product, a coupon for logo 2 will automatically printed for the purchaser of the cheese burger. Also, if logo 1 of the header is used in the company logo, and cut command + logo 1 print command are registered in the user macro 2 of (5), the company name of logo 1 will be printed. The user macro 1 of (3) is used when a center alignment of the auto logo is necessary. In such a case, it is necessary to register the left alignment command in the user macro 2 of (5), and to return based on the settings. ******************** MCDONALD S ******************** 1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00 2.COKE $1.00 ------------------------- ---------- TOTAL $3.00 Header ******************** MCDONALD S ******************** 1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00 2.COKE $1.00 ------------------------- ---------- TOTAL $3.00 Logo1 Current System Print Data Current System Print Data 1. AutoLogo triggered by cut command 3. User macro 1 executed Cheeseburger Partial Cut 4. AutoLogo printed Partial Cut COKE Logo3 5. User macro 2 executed Paper is cut Header logo is printed Header ******************** MCDONALD S 3-198

2) Simple Auto Logo Function Preset the Simple Auto Logo function, and execute the following operations with the printing cut command under the existing system as a trigger. (1) Simple Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger. (2) Center alignment command process (3) Execute printing of logo 2. (4) Paper is fed to cutting position, then a partial cut is executed. (5) Execute printing of logo 1. (6) Recover position alignment command to setting to before execution of simple Auto Logo With the simple Auto Logo function the logo number of the logo to print is predetermined. ******************** MCDONALD S ******************** 1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00 2.COKE $1.00 ------------------------- ---------- TOTAL $3.00 Header Logo1 ******************** MCDONALD S ******************** 1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00 2.COKE $1.00 ----------------------------------- TOTAL $3.00 Current System Print Data Current System Print Data 1. AutoLogo triggered by cut command 2. Center alignment 3. Logo2 is printed Footer Logo2 4. Paper is fed to cutting position and partially cut 5. Logo1 is printed. 6. Returns to position alignment Header Logo1 ******************** MCDONALD S Command Transmission Example 1) Set the Auto Logo function in advance and register to the non-volatile memory. ESC GS / 1 n ( n = 0x01): Standard Auto Logo Function ON ESC GS / 2 n ( n = / ): Auto Logo Command Character ( / ) Specification ESC GS / 3 nl nh d1 d2 dk: User macro 1 definition nl = 3 nh = 0: Register macro data count = 3 bytes d1 = 0x1b d2 = 0x61 d3 = 0x01: Registration macro <ESC a 1: Center alignment> ESC GS / 4 nl nh d1 d2 dk: User macro 2 definition nl = 16 nh = 0: Register macro data count = 16 bytes d1 = 0x1d d2 = 0x56 d3 = 0x42 d4 = 0x00: Registration macro <GS V 66 0: Convey to cutting position; partial cut> d5 = 0x1 c d6 = 0x70 d7 = 0x01 d8 = 0x00: <FS p 1 0: Print logo 1> d9 = 0x1b d10 = 0x61 d11= 0x00: <ESC a 0: Left alignment> d12 = 0x1b d13 = 0x70 d14 = 0x03 d15 = 0x64 d16 = 0x00: <ESC p 3 100 0: Drawer Drive> ESC GS / 5 n ( n = 0x01 ): Auto Logo Command Character, Space Switch ESC GS / 6 n ( n = 0x01 ): Partial Cut Prior to Auto Logo Print ESC GS / W : Register Auto Logo Definition Data to Non-volatile Memory 2) Embed and send registered command character to print data. CHEESE BURGER /2 is recognized as the Auto Logo command character. /2 is converted to a space and 2 specifies logo 2. 3-199

ESC GS / W [Name] Registers Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory. [Code] ASCII ESC GS / W Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 57 Decimal 27 29 47 87 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Registers Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory. After registration ends, resets the printer. This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. ESC GS / C [Name] Initializes Auto Logo setting of non-volatile memory. [Code] ASCII ESC GS / C Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 43 Decimal 27 29 47 67 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Initializes registered data of the Auto Logo function in the non-volatile memory. After initialization ends, resets the printer. This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. The following shows the initial values of the Auto Logo function. Set Auto Logo Function Command Character User macro 1 User macro 2 Convert Command Character Partial cut just prior to Auto Logo printing Initial Value OFF None None None Do not print Invalid 3-200

ESC GS / 1 n [Name] Set ON/OFF for Auto Logo function [Code] ASCII ESC GS / 1 n Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 31 n Decimal 27 29 47 49 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 2 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets ON/OFF for Auto Logo function. This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid (Auto Logo function is not executed even if the cutting command is executed.). This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. n Setting 0 Auto Logo Function OFF 1 Standard Auto Logo Function ON <Operating Specifications> (1) Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger. (2) Execute printing if print data exists in the image buffer. (3) Execute user macro 1 (4) Auto Logo Printing (5) Execute user macro 2 2 Simple Auto Logo Function ON <Operating Specifications> (1) Auto Logo function starts up using the existing system cut command as a trigger. (2) Execute printing if print data exists in the image buffer. (3) Execute center alignment. (4) Print logo 2 (2-color printing setting: Logo 3) (5) Paper is fed to cutting position, then a partial cut is executed. (6) Printing of logo 1. (7) Recover position alignment setting Caution When this is set, user macros and command characters are invalid. When this is set, the command character / is printed as /. ) The following shows the command that is the trigger for the Auto Logo function. If the standard Auto Logo function is turned ON by n = 1, the trigger command below functions only as a trigger, so the cutting operation is not executed. Therefore, it is necessary to register an arbitrary cutting command in user macro 2. If the simple Auto Logo function is turned ON by n = 2, the cutting command is executed, and is the trigger for the simple Auto Logo function. GS V m: Cut Command GS V m n: Cut Command ESC m: Cut Command ESC i: Cut Command <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-201

ESC GS / 2 n [Name] Set command characters [Code] ASCII ESC GS / 2 n Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 32 n Decimal 27 29 47 50 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 32 n 127, n = 0 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets command character for the Auto Logo function. This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command. This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. n Setting 32 to 127 Command Character 0 No set command characters Command characters are characters that are commands for specifying the logo number to print with Auto Logo printing. If the / is specified by the command character, /2/3 is embedded in the print data. The printer processes / not as character data but as a command, stores the number continuing after, and prints as an Auto Logo in the sotred order. Therefore, if /2/3/ is embedded, the Auto Logo is printed in the order of logo 2, logo 3. At that time, if the specified logo is not registered, logo printing is ignored. If the setting is for not command character setting, no logo will be printed. Note that /2/3 is processed as a command so there is no print. However, /2/3/ is converted to a space by the ESC GS /5 n command. Also, only the initial logo is printed if the same logo is duplicated, such as in /2/3/2/2. 32 logos can be stored as Auto Logos. Continuing the command character, the following shows the defined area of the character d of the logo number specification. 1 d 9 (49 d 57 ) Logo number 1 to 9 A d F (65 d 70 ) Logo number 10 to 15 When page mode is selected, only setting is valid <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-202

ESC GS / 3 nl nh d1 d2... dk [Name] Set user macro 1 [Code] ASCII ESC GS / 3 nl nh d1 d2... dk Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 33 nl nh d1 d2... dk Decimal 27 29 47 51 nl nh d1 d2... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 nl 64, nh = 0 1 (nl + nh 256) 64 dk = (nl + nh 256) 0 d 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : No user macro 1 setting ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets user macro 1 for the Auto Logo function. This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command. This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. Register print data to the user macro 1. Maximum 64 bytes of registered data Note that registering Auto Logo command characters in the user macros is prohibited. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-203

ESC GS / 4 nl nh d1 d2... dk [Name] Set user macro 2 [Code] ASCII ESC GS / 4 nl nh d1 d2... dk Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 34 nl nh d1 d2... dk Decimal 27 29 47 52 nl nh d1 d2... dk [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 nl 64, nh = 0 1 (nl + nh 256) 64 dk = (nl + nh 256) 0 d 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : No user macro 2 setting ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets user macro 2 for the Auto Logo function. This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command. This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. Register print data to the user macro 2. Maximum 64 bytes of registered data Note that registering Auto Logo command characters in the user macros is prohibited. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-204

ESC GS / 5 n [Name] Set command character switching method [Code] ASCII ESC GS / 5 n Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 35 n Decimal 27 29 47 53 n [Defined Thermal : 0 n 1 Area] ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets command character conversion method for the Auto Logo function. This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command. This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. n Setting 0 Does not print command character or logo number continuing after that. 1 Converts the command character and logo number that follows in a space character (0 x 20). If / is specified for the command character, the /2 embedded in the print data is processed not as a character string but as a command. At that time, /2 is processed as a command so there is no print. However, /2 is converted to a space by the n = 1 specification of this command. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-205

ESC GS / 6 n [Name] Set partial cut just prior to Auto Logo printing [Code] ASCII ESC GS / 6 n Hexadecimal 1b 1d 2f 36 n Decimal 27 29 47 54 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 1 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets the partial cut setting just prior to Auto Logo printing This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS / W command. This command is ignored while Auto Logo is executing. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid n Setting 0 Does not execute partial cut just prior to Auto Logo printing 1 Executes partial cut just prior to Auto Logo printing 3-206

Header *************** ******************** MCDONALD S MACDONALDS ******************** 1.CHEESBUGER 1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00 2.COKE $1.00 ----------------------------------- - - TOTAL $3.00 TOTAL $3.00 1. AutoLogo triggered by cut command 2. User macro 1 is executed 3. AutoLogo is printed. Cheeseburger Header COKE Partial Cut Logo2 is printed Partial Cut Logo3 is printed 4. User macro 2 is executed. Paper is cut. Head logo is printed Header ******************** MCDONALD S 3-207

This command selects execution of a partial cut just prior to Auto Logo Logo 2, and Logo 3, when executing Logos 2 and 3 as an Auto Logo print, as shown above. If a partial cut is set to be executed by this function, it is possible to supply coupons printed by Auto Logo cut by the partial cut. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-208

3-3-20-5) STAR Original Buzzer Commands ESC GS BEL m t1 t2 [Name] Ring buzzer [Code] ASCII ESC GS BEL m t1 t2 Hexadecimal 1B 1D 07 m t1 t2 Decimal 27 29 7 m t1 t2 [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 m 2 1 t1 255, 1 t2 255 Slip : 1 m 2 1 t1 255, 1 t2 255 ation : 1 m 2 1 t1 255, 1 t2 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Rings buzzer. m specifies the buzzer drive terminal. m Buzzer Drive Terminals 1, 49 Buzzer drive terminal 1 2, 50 Buzzer drive terminal 2 t1 specifies the energizing time; t2 specifies the delay time. Energizing time = 20msec t1 Delay time = 20msec t2 Buzzer cannot ring while printer is printing. This command is prohibited for use for anything other than ringing the buzzer. (When this command is used for the drawer drive on models equipped with an external device terminal, it will be damaged, so care is needed.) Drive Pulse ON OFF 20 t1 (msec) 20 t2 (msec) (Energizing Time) (Delay Time) Print Operation Printing and Paper Feed Prohibited 3-209

ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2 [Name] Set external buzzer drive pulse condition [Code] ASCII ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2 Hexadecimal 1B 1D 19 11 m n1 n2 Decimal 27 29 25 17 m n1 n2 [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 m 2, 49 m 50 ( 1 m 2 ) 0 n1 255, 0 n2 255 Slip : 1 m 2, 49 m 50 ( 1 m 2 ) 0 n1 255, 0 n2 255 ation : 1 m 2, 49 m 50 ( 1 m 2 ) 0 n1 255, 0 n2 255 [Initial Value] Thermal : n1 = 0, n2 = 0 Slip : n1 = 0, n2 = 0 ation : n1 = 0, n2 = 0 [Function] Set external buzzer drive pulse condition. m specifies the buzzer drive terminal that sets the condition. m Buzzer Drive Terminals 1, 49 Buzzer drive terminal 1 2, 50 Buzzer drive terminal 2 n1 specifies the energizing time; n2 specifies the delay time. Energizing time = 20msec n1 Delay time = 20msec n2 Drive Pulse ON OFF 20 n1(msec) 20 n2(msec) (Energizing Time) (Delay Time) Print Operation Printing and Paper Feed Prohibited The drive of the external buzzer set by this command is performed by ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2. The set value is not initialized by ESC @. Note The setting using this command is valid for all stations and modes. 3-210

ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2 [Name] Execute external buzzer drive [Code] ASCII ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2 Hexadecimal 1B 1D 19 12 m n1 n2 Decimal 27 29 25 18 m n1 n2 [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 m 2, 49 m 50 ( 1 m 2 ) 1 n1 20, n2 = 0 Slip : 1 m 2, 49 m 50 ( 1 m 2 ) 1 n1 20, n2 = 0 ation : 1 m 2, 49 m 50 ( 1 m 2 ) 1 n1 20, n2 = 0 [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] Repeatedly drives the buzzer according to the ON/OFF conditions set by the external buzzer drive pulse condition command ESC GS EM DC1 m t1 t2. m specifies the buzzer drive terminal to drive. m Buzzer Drive Terminals 1, 49 Buzzer drive terminal 1 2, 50 Buzzer drive terminal 2 Specifies the number of times to repeat buzzer drive with (n2 x 256 + n1). Buzzer cannot ring while printer is printing. This command is prohibited for use for anything other than ringing the buzzer. (When this command is used for the drawer drive on models equipped with an external device terminal, it will be damaged, so it is absolutely prohibited.) The buzzer can be stopped by pressing the FEED switch or the RELEASE switch while the buzzer is ringing, or opening the rear or front covers. [Ex.:] n1 = 8 ON Drive Pulse OFF ON OFF Print Operation Printing/Paper Feed Prohibited (Note) If the off time is set to 0 (zero), it is possible to ring the buzzer continuously for the amount of n1. For example, if on = 5 seconds, off = 0, and n1 = 20 times, the buzzer will ring for 100 seconds. 3-211

3-3-20-6) STAR Original Print Starting Trigger Control Commands This command is for models equipped with an expansion control function that page-controls the command in line units by page-controlling the image buffer. ESC GS g 0 m n [Name] Print starting trigger [Code] ASCII ESC GS g 0 m n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 67 30 m n Decimal 27 29 103 48 m n [Defined Area] Thermal : m = 0, n = 0 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Starts printing if there is unprinted data in the image buffer. When page mode is selected, 6 bytes ignored <Slip>, <ation> 6 bytes ignored ESC GS g 1 m n [Name] Set print start timer [Code] ASCII ESC GS g 1 m n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 67 31 m n Decimal 27 29 103 49 m n [Defined Area] Thermal : m = 0, 0 n 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : See the models below. ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets the print starting timer specified by n x 10 msec. The print starting timer starts measuring from the point where the reception of print data stops, up to the set printing starting time. When the set print starting time is reached, this starts printing if there is unprinted data in the image buffer. n Operating Mode 0 Print start timer = default value 1 to 255 Print start timer = n x 10 msec <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-212

3-3-20-7) STAR Original Two-dimensional Bar Code QR Code Commands * QR codes are a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE Incorporated. This command prints 2-dimensional bar codes QR codes. Commands for 2-dimensional bar codes QR codes are separated into the following four classes but the function. (1 ) Bar code type setting (<ESC> <GS> y S ) (2 ) Bar code data setting (<ESC> <GS> y D ) (3 ) STAR page mode setting (<ESC> <GS> y T ) (4 ) Print bar code (<ESC> <GS> y P ) (5 ) Get bar code expansion information (<ESC> <GS> y I ) The details of the functions are outlined below. (1 ) Bar code type setting command These commands set the bar code type. These are all set to default. Only use them if you wish to change them. (Refer to following details for settings.) Cell Alignment Pattern Specify model using <ESC> <GS> y S 0. Currently supported models are model 1 and model 2. To improve tolerance to distortion when codes are large on model 2, an alignment pattern has been added to the structure. Specify the error correction level using <ESC> <GS> y S 1. It is possible to read QR code even part of the data is corrupted, using error correction. If this level is raised, the bar code size is increased because there is more backup information. Specify the size of the cell (one square region the composes the QR code) using <ESC> <GS> y S 2. The vertical and horizontal sizes for the QR code are equal length squares, but the size of the bar code image generated is determined by the cell size. See Appendix 9 for details on the actual printed QR code size. These are individual settings, so the following errors may occur even if there are no problems. In such cases, the bar code will not be generated, and the (4) print command (<ESC> <GS> y P ) will be ignored, and an error code will be returned with (5) get bar code expansion information. An error occurs when generating the bar code by the combination of settings. When the print data exceeds the currently set print region. Therefore, it is recommended to use the (5) Get bar code expansion information command (<ESC> <GS> y I ) as a means for checking for these errors prior to printing. 3-213

(2) Bar code data setting command This command sets the bar code print data. There are four types of data types that can be set by the QR code. They are: numbers, alpha-numeric characters, binary and Kanji characters. However, with these specifications, there are two data setting methods. They are: A method that specifies that data along with the bar code data (data manual analysis); and a method that specifies only the bar code data (data automatic analysis). (3) STAR page mode setting command This command sets the expansion starting position and rotation information relating to bar code data expansion. (4) Bar code printing command This command prints the bar codes based on the settings of (1) and (3). (5) Bar code expansion information acquisition command This command checks whether to print the bar code based on the settings of (1) to (3). = Precautions When Using the Commands = For (1) to (3), the setting values are retained if the following operations are not applied. New setting command is sent. Initialize command is sent (<ESC> @) Power is turned off. With regard to (2), when an error occurs in command transmission, the set data is cleared, and the command is invalid. With regard to (4) and (5), send as needed. Printing When printing, the horizontal tabs, absolute position specification, relative position specification, and position movement using position alignment are valid. Upside down printing and 2-color printing are possible. Bar codes to be printed should always be confirmed through an actual printout. 3-214

Below is a command transmission example. (1) Bar code type setting <ESC> <GS> y S 0 1: Set to model 1. <ESC> <GS> y S 1 0: Set error correction level to L. <ESC> <GS> y S 2 3: Set cell size to 3 dots. (2)` Bar code data setting <ESC> <GS> y D 1 0 20 0 January 1, 2005 (SAT) <LF>: Set bar code data (data automatic analysis) <ESC> <GS> y D 2 10 1 4 0 2005, : Set bar code data (data manual analysis) 4 2 0 Year, 1 1 0 1, 4 2 0 Month, 1 1 0 1, 4 2 0 Day, 4 2 0 (, 2 3 0 SAT, 4 2 0 ), 3 1 0 <LF> (3) Print bar code To confirm printability using the current settings, confirm the bar code expansion information. <ESC> <GS> y I : Check bar code expansion information <ESC> <GS> y P : Prints 3-215

ESC GS y S 0 n [Name] Set QR code model [Code] ASCII ESC GS y S 0 n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 79 53 30 n Decimal 27 29 121 83 48 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 2 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 2 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets the model. Parameter details n Set model 1 Model 1 2 Model 2 <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. ESC GS y S 1 n [Name] Set QR code mistake correction level [Code] ASCII ESC GS y S 1 n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 79 53 31 n Decimal 27 29 121 83 49 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 n 3 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 0 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets the error correction level. Parameter details n Error Correction Level Error Correction Rate (%) 0 L 7 1 M 15 2 Q 25 3 H 30 <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-216

ESC GS y S 2 n [Name] Set QR code cell size [Code] ASCII ESC GS y S 2 n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 79 53 32 n Decimal 27 29 121 83 50 n [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 n 8 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : n = 3 ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets the cell size. Parameter details n: Cell size (Units: Dots) Specification using this command is recommended to be 3 n. To use with n = 1 and 2, confirm by actual use. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-217

ESC GS y D 1 m nl nh d1 d2... dk [Name] Set QR code data (auto setting) [Code] ASCII ESC GS y D 1 m nl nh d1 d2 dk Hexadecimal 1B 1D 79 44 31 m nl nh d1 d2 dk Decimal 27 29 121 68 49 m nl nh d1 d2 dk [Defined Area] Thermal : m = 0 1 nl + nh 256 70890 nl 255, 0 nh 255 (k = nl + nh 256) 0 d 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> This command analyzes the data type of the bar code and sets the data. Parameter details nl + nh 256: Byte count of bar code data dk : Bar code data (max. 7089 bytes) When using this command, the printer receives data of the number of bytes (k) specified by nl and nh, automatically analyzes the data and sets that as the bar code data. nl and nh specify the number of data bytes. When processed as a Chinese character code, two bytes are one character. If the parameter is outside the defined area, this command receives and discards the counter portion. At that time, bar code data is not cleared. The command data storage region is shared with the manual setting command, so data is updated each time either command is executed. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-218

ESC GS y D 2 a m1 n1l n1h d11 d12...d1k... ml nll nlh dl1 dl2...dlk [Name] Set QR bar code data (manual setting) [Code] ASCII ESC GS y D 2 a m1 n1l n1h d11 d12 d1k Hexadecimal 1B 1D 79 44 32 a m1 n1l n1h d11 d12 d1k Decimal 27 29 121 68 50 a m1 n1l n1h d11 d12 d1k ASCII m2 n2l n2h D21 d22 d2k ml dlk Hexadecimal m2 n2l n2h D21 d22 d2k ml dlk Decimal m2 n2l n2h D21 d22 d2k ml dlk [Defined Area] Thermal : 1 a 255 1 m 4 1 nl + nh 256 70890 nl 255, 0 nh 255 (k = nl + nh 256) 0 d 255 1 l 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> This command specifies the bar code data type and sets the data. Parameter details a: Block count m: Input data type nl + nh 256: Byte count of bar code data dk: Bar code data (max. 7089 bytes) m Data type Data Defined Area (d) 1 Numbers 0 to 9 2 Alphanumeric, $, %, *, +, -,., /, :, 0 to 9, A to Z 3 Binary 0x00 to 0xFF 4 Kanji Characters (Shift JIS) 0x8140 to 0x9FFC, 0xE040 to 0xEBBF However, the lower 8 bits are 0x40 to 0x7E, 0x80 to 0xFC. The printer receives the data type specified by m, based on the block count specified by a, and the data of the number of bytes (k) specified by nl and nh, and sets that as the bar code data. One block specified by a specifies m1 n1l n1h d11 d1k (data type + data count + bar code data), and by sending a multiple of these continuously, data types can be included in one bar code. It is possible to set a maximum of 255 blocks with one command transmission. nl and nh specify the number of data bytes, so for Kanji characters, calculation is done using 1 character for two bytes. If the parameter is outside the defined area, this command receives and discards the counter portion. At that time, bar code data is cleared. The command data storage region is shared with the automatic setting command, so data is updated each time either command is executed. <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 3-219

ESC GS y P [Name] Print QR code [Code] ASCII ESC GS y P Hexadecimal 1B 1D 79 50 Decimal 27 29 121 80 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> When standard mode is selected, prints the bar code data. When standard mode is selected, and there is unprinted data in the image buffer when executing this command, the unprinted data is printed, then the bar code is printed. When page mode is selected, only expansion of the bar code data to the image buffer is performed. Margins of more than 4 cells are required around the QR code. The user must ensure the margins. Bar codes to be printed should always be confirmed through an actual printout. <Slip>, <ation> 4 bytes ignored 3-220

ESC GS y I [Name] Get QR code expansion information [Code] ASCII ESC GS y I Hexadecimal 1B 1D 79 49 Decimal 27 29 121 73 [Defined Area] Thermal : - ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> In expanding bar codes with the current setting using this command, information such as the size of the generated image and errors is sent to the printer. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether printing is possible before actual printing, with this command. If there is an error in the bar code expansion, the command is ignored even if the expansion command ESC GS y P is sent. Also, if the following errors occur, Error information is sent to the printer. An error occurs when generating the bar code by the combination of bar code setting commands. When the generated bar code data exceeds the printable size Transmission Format: <ESC> <GS> y I n1 n2 n1 n2 Bar Code Information 0x0000 Error 0x0001 to 0xffff Size of one side of generated bar code data (Units: Dots) <Slip>, <ation> Send <ESC> <GS> y I 0 0 (error) 3-221

3-3-20-8) STAR Original Page Function Commands ESC GS h 0 k m n [Name] 180 Inversion Function [Code] ASCII ESC GS h 0 k m n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 68 30 k m n Decimal 27 29 104 48 k m n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 k 1, m = 0, n = 0 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets to make 180 inversion function valid/invalid. n 180 Inversion Function 0 Invalid 1 When page mode is selected, only setting is valid <180 Invertion Function> When the 180 inversion function is valid, it is executed by the 180 inversion trigger. However, this function is executed on print data that fits in the image buffer length. If print data is larger than the image buffer length, the 180 inversion function is ignored. Also, when starting printing using anything other than the 180 inversion trigger, the 180 inversion function is ignored. This setting is not cleared by the ESC @ command. 180 Inversion Triggers Cutter commands: GS V m, GS V m n, ESC m, ESC i Print Startup Command: ESC GS g 0 m n Example of Use 1) 180 Inversion Function : ESC GS h 0 k m n (k = 0x01, m = 0x00, n = 0x00) 2) Transmit print data: Print data (print length is within the length of the image buffer) 3) Trigger command transmission: GS V m n (cutter command is 180º inversion trigger) <Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Note When using this function, the data volume for one page should be within the printer s buffer length. 3-222

ESC GS h 1 k m n [Name] Water Mark Function [Code] ASCII ESC GS h 1 k m n Hexadecimal 1B 1D 68 31 k m n Decimal 27 29 104 49 k m n [Defined Area] Thermal : 0 k 2, 0 m 2, 1 n 255 ation : - [Initial Value] Thermal : - ation : - [Function] <Thermal> Sets to make water mark function valid/invalid. k Water Mark Function 0 Invalid 1 Prints one logo specified by n at the position centered in the horizontal and vertical directions. 2 Repeatedly prints logo specified by n from leading edge of the page to the trailing end of the page, at the position centered in the horizontal direction. Set the forming method of the logo data to be printed as the water mark to make the image appropriate as the water mark with this setting. If the appropriate image is not possible with this setting, re-register after forming the logo data registered as the water mark as the appropriate data. m Water Mark Data Forming 0 Prints logo data specified n as it is. 1 Thins logo data specified n 25% in the printout. 2 Thins logo data specified n 12.5% in the printout. Specify the registered logo as the water mark. n Logo Number 1 to 255 Registered logo number If the specified logo number is not registered, the water mark will not be printed. When page mode is selected, only setting is valid <Water Mark Function> When the water mark inversion function is valid, it is printed by the water mark printing trigger. However, this function is executed on print data that fits in the image buffer length. If print data is larger than the image buffer length, the water mark printing is ignored. Also, when starting printing using anything other than the water mark printing trigger, water mark printing is ignored. When in 2-color printing mode, this function is ignored. This setting is not cleared by the ESC @ command. Water Mark Printing Triggers Cutter commands: Print Startup Command: GS V m, GS V m n, ESC m, ESC i ESC GS g 0 m n Example of Use 1) Register logo to use as the water mark as logo #1. 2) Water mark function is valid.: ESC GS h 1 k m n (k = 0x02, m = 0x01, n = 0x01 ) 3) Transmit print data: Print data (print length is within the length of the image buffer) 4) Trigger command transmission: GS V m n (cutter command is water mark printing trigger) 3-223

<Slip>, <ation> Only setting is valid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Note When using this function, the data volume for one page should be within the printer s buffer length. 3-224

4) CHARACTER CODE TABLE See the character code specifications 4-1

5) APPENDIX 5-1) Appendix 1 Precautions <Precautions for Printing and Paper Feeding in Thermal> (1) This is a line printer so paper feeding operations always accompany printing. Therefore, if the line feed amount of one line is set to a value smaller than the print data, paper is sometimes fed more than the set feed amount to print. For example, if the line feed amount for one line is set to 10 dots (10/180 inch), paper is fed 10 dots with only a line feed operation, but when printing a bit image, a 24-dot paper feed is executed. Paper Feed Amount Necessary Paper Feed Amount (Dots) Font A 24 x Double-tall Standard Characters Font B 24 x Double-tall OCR-B 24 x Double-tall Kanji Fonts 24 x Double-tall Font A 12 x Double-tall Rotated Characters Font B 9 x Double-tall OCR-B 16 x Double-tall Kanji Fonts 24 x Double-tall Bit image (ESC *) 24 (2) When the printer is waiting for data from the host while printing, printing and paper feeds are temporarily stopped, but when data is received and printing starts, there may be some disruption of the paper feed for 1 to 3 dot lines when starting printing. This particularly affects printing bit images. (3) It is recommended to perform the auto-cutter operation after printing more than 10 lines or after a paper feed. 3) It is recommended to perform the auto-cutter operation after printing more than 10 lines or after a paper feed. (If the cut paper is small, it is difficult to discharge, and can easily cause paper jams.) 5-1

5-2) Appendix 2 Status Specifications 5-2-1) Identification of Transmission Status A specific bit value is fixed for the status sent by the printer so it is possible to identify the status of the command. However, when using ASB, 3 bytes after checking the first byte of the ASB, excluding Xoff, are processed as the ASB status. If this is not done, it is not possible to identify statuses such as the status transmission (GS r) and statuses after the second byte of ASB. Identification of the transmission status Command/Functions Status Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 GS I 0 * * 0 * * * * GS r 0 * * 0 * * * * Xon 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Xoff 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 DLE EOT 0 * * 1 * * 1 0 ASB (First Byte) 0 * * 1 * * 0 0 ASB (Second to Fourth Byte) 0 * * 0 * * * * 5-2-2) Details of Causes of Errors by Model Error HSP7000 Recoverable Error Receipt Near-end Error Receipt cover open when receipt is selected Slip cover open when slip selected Receipt paper out error Slip TOF/COF/BOF error Auto-recovery Error Thermal head high temperature detection error Impact head high temperature detection error Non-recoverable Error Cutter Error Clamp error ation error Detection of thermal head thermistor error Detection of impact head thermistor error Slip carriage malfunction Flash access error detected EEPROM access error detected SRAM access error detected Power Voltage Error Value Detected * If a non-recoverable error occurs, turn the printer power off immediately. 5-2

5-2-3) DLE EOT Status (1) Cut paper status (n = 0, a = 1) Bit Contents Status Support by Model 0 1 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0-6 Undefined (0) - 5 Undefined (0) - 4 Fixed at 1-3 Discharge detector Has paper Paper out 2 Undefined (0) - 1 Fixed at 1-0 Fixed at 0 - (2) Printer status (n = 1) Bit Contents Status Support by Model 0 1 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0-6 Undefined (0) - 5 Waiting for recover to online Not waiting for recovery Waiting for recovery 4 Fixed at 1-3 Online/Offline status Online Offline 2 Drawer kick connector #3 pin Low High 1 Fixed at 1-0 Fixed at 0 - Bit 5: High when waiting for macro execution (GS ^) Bit 3: High when waiting for macro execution (GS ^) (3) Offline cause status (n = 2) Bit Contents Status Support by Model 0 1 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0-6 Error None Yes 5 Stopped because of roll paper is out No printing stop Printing stopped 4 Fixed at 1-3 Paper feed by paper feed switch Not feeding paper Feeding paper 2 Cover Status Cover closed Cover open 1 Fixed at 1-0 Fixed at 0 - Bit 6: This error indicates a non-recoverable error. Bit 5: High when printing is stopped by paper out (4) Error cause status (n = 3) Bit Contents Status Support by Model 0 1 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0-6 Auto-recovery error None Yes 5 Non-recoverable error None Yes 4 Fixed at 1-3 Auto cutter error None Yes 2 Mechanical error None Yes 1 Fixed at 1-0 Fixed at 0-5-3

(5) Continuous paper detector status (n = 4) Bit Contents Status Support by Model 0 1 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0-6 Roll paper end detector Paper Paper out 5 Roll paper end detector Paper Paper out 4 Fixed at 1-3 Roll paper near end detector Paper Paper out 2 Roll paper near end detector Paper Paper out 1 Fixed at 1-0 Fixed at 0 - (6) Slip status (n = 5) Bit Contents Status Support by Model 0 1 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0-6 BOF detector Paper Paper out 5 TOF detector Paper Paper out 4 Fixed at 1-3 Waiting slip paper insertion Not waiting for insertion Waiting for insertion 2 Slip paper selected Selected Not selected 1 Fixed at 1-0 Fixed at 0 - (7) ation paper status (n = 6) Bit Contents Status Support by Model 0 1 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0-6 ation detector Paper Paper out 5 ation detector Paper Paper out 4 Fixed at 1-3 Waiting validation paper insertion Not waiting for insertion Waiting for insertion 2 ation paper selected Selected Not selected 1 Fixed at 1-0 Fixed at 0-5-4

5-2-4) ASB Status Specifications This ASB status applies to all interfaces. However, see section 5-2-5 Printer Status Transmission Specification when using Ethernet and Wireless LAN Interfaces for Ethernet. (1) First Byte (Printer Information) Bit Contents Status Target Status n (Bits) Support by Model 0 1 6 5 3 2 1 0 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0 6 Paper feed by paper feed switch Not feeding Feeding paper paper 5 Cover Status Closed Open 4 Fixed at 1 3 Online/Offline status Online Offline 2 Drawer kick connector #3 pin Low High 1 Undefined (0) 0 Undefined (0) Bit 3: High when waiting for macro execution (GS ^) (2) Second Byte (Error Information) Bit Contents Status Target Status n (Bits) Support by Model 0 1 6 5 3 2 1 0 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0 6 Auto-recovery error None Yes 5 Non-recoverable error None Yes 4 Fixed at 0 3 Auto cutter error None Yes 2 Mechanical error None Yes 1 Paper feed switch status Not pressed Pressed 0 Waiting for recover to online Not waiting for Waiting for recovery recovery Bit 0: High when waiting for macro execution (GS ^) (3) Third Byte (Paper Detector Information) Bit Contents Status Target Status n (Bits) Support by Model 0 1 6 5 3 2 1 0 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0 6 Slip BOF Detector Paper Paper out 5 Slip COF Detector Paper Paper out 4 Fixed at 0 3 Roll paper end detector Paper Paper out 2 Roll paper end detector Paper Paper out 1 Roll paper near end detector Paper Paper out 0 Roll paper near end detector Paper Paper out (4) Fourth Byte (Paper Detector Information) Bit Contents Status Target Status n (Bits) Support by Model 0 1 6 5 3 2 1 0 HSP7000 7 Fixed at 0 6 TOF detector Paper Paper out 5 TOF detector Paper Paper out 4 Fixed at 0 3 ation Printing Printable Not printable 2 ation paper selected Selected Not selected 1 Slip printing Printable Not printable 0 Slip paper selected Selected Not selected 5-5

5-2-5) Printer Status Transmission Specification when Using Ethernet I/F The following explains the printer status transmission specification when using Ethernet and wireless LAN interfaces. See the STAR Line Mode Command Specifications for details on STAR ASB specifications. 1) Transmission Format When transmitting only STAR ASB STAR ASB (Second Byte Bit 7 = 1) + Length (Length = 0x0000) When transmitting printer status other than STAR ASB STAR ASB (Second Byte Bit 7 = 1) + Length + Status Data <Length Details> 2 byte value indicating status data byte count (0x0000 Length 0x0200) When the status data is 10 bytes: Length = 0x000a When transmitting only STAR ASB: Add Length = 0x0000 When Star ASB second byte Bit7, and Length is added, Bit7 = 1 is set. For status analysis, the total byte count of ASB is detected using the first byte of Star ASB, and whether length is added with the second byte Bit7 of Star ASB is detected. By getting the byte count of subsequent status data using the length, the status can be analyzed. 2) Status Data Transmission Format: Status Type + Delimiter Character 1 + Data Type + Status Length + Printer Status + Delimiter Character2 (1) Status Type (2 Bytes or 4 Bytes) First, Second Bytes Indicate a factor of printer status occurring. 00 : Reserved 01 to 09 : Reserved 10 to 49 : STAR Original Status Request Commands 50 : ESC/POS ASB 51 to 59 : ESC/POS real-time status request command 60 to 99 : ESC/POS status request command A0 : ESC/POS [header to NUL] block status request command A1 to FF : Reserved Third, Fourth Bytes If the factor is the command, indicates the n parameter of the command. If there is no n parameter, the third and fourth bytes can be omitted. <Ex.> If n = 0x01 with the DLE EOT n command, the third and fourth bytes are 01. (2) Delimiter character 1 (1 byte) Sends :. (3) Data Type (1byte) Indicates the data type of the printer status, and sends B (binary type). (4) Status length (2 bytes) 2 byte value indicating byte count of printer status 5-6

(5) Printer status (variable) Status sent by printer The content of the status differs according to the cause. Refer to Commands That are Factors, and Automatic Status for details on the content of the status. (6) Delimiter character 2 (1 Byte) Sends ;. 3) Status Transmission Specifications List Status Factors ESC/POS ASB Automatic Status DLE EOT n (Excluding n = 8) Printer status request GS I n Printer ID request GS r n Printer status request GS r 80 Cut paper remaining dot count request GS ( L/GS 8 L fn48, 51, 64 FS ( e FS a 0 DLE DC4 8 GS ( H fn64 GS ( k fn82 GS ( C fn2, 3, 4, 5 [Header to NUL] Block data request DLE DC4 8 ESC GS y I QR code information request STAR ASB STAR ASB STAR ASB STAR ASB STAR ASB STAR ASB STAR ASB STAR ASB Length First, Second Bytes Factors Status Type Third, Fourth Bytes n Parameter Status Data Delimiter Data Status Printer Delimiter 1 Type Length Status 2 0x000B 50 Omitted : B 0x0004 Status ; 0x000A 51 00 n 06 0x000A 61 01 n 03 31 n 33 0x000A 62 01 n 03 31 n 33 Variable Length Variable Length : B 0x0001 Status ; : B 0x0001 Status ; : B 0x0001 Status ; 62 n= 50 : B Variable Length A0 Omitted : B Variable Length Block Data Block Data 0x000D 19 Omitted : B 0x0006 Status ; ; ; 5-7

5-3) Appendix 3 Blank Page Configuration A blank page is a code table where character codes from 80h to FFh are all blank. It can be specified using the following commands. ESC t n (n = 255) ESC GS t n (n = 255) Also, writing data to the blank code page region is possible using the following command. ESC GS = (1) Example configuration of Font A data. (12 x 24 font) MSB LSB MSB LSB d1 d2 0 0 0 0 d3 d4 0 0 0 0 d5 d6 0 0 0 0 d7 d8 0 0 0 0 d9 d10 0 0 0 0 d11 d12 0 0 0 0 d13 d14 0 0 0 0 d15 d16 0 0 0 0 d17 d18 0 0 0 0 d19 d20 0 0 0 0 d21 d22 0 0 0 0 d23 d24 0 0 0 0 d25 d26 0 0 0 0 d27 d28 0 0 0 0 d29 d30 0 0 0 0 d31 d32 0 0 0 0 d33 d34 0 0 0 0 d35 d36 0 0 0 0 d37 d38 0 0 0 0 d39 d40 0 0 0 0 d41 d42 0 0 0 0 d43 d44 0 0 0 0 d45 d46 0 0 0 0 d47 d48 0 0 0 0 (2) Example configuration of Font B data. (9 x 24 font) MSB LSB MSB LSB d1 d2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d3 d4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d5 d6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d7 d8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d9 d10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d11 d12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d13 d14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d15 d16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d17 d18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d19 d20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d21 d22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d23 d24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d25 d26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d27 d28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d29 d30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d31 d32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d33 d34 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d35 d36 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d37 d38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d39 d40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d41 d42 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d43 d44 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d45 d46 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d47 d48 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5-8

5-4) Appendix 4 Standard Mode EPSON has models equipped with 180 and 203 DPI print heads. STAR print heads are 203 DPI, so if a EPSON 180 DPI print head model is targeted, it is necessary to correct the printing positions that are different because of the difference in print density of such print heads. This correction is performed using the print positions: ESC/POS compatible mode/maximum memory switch. By setting this memory to ESC/POS compatible mode, it is possible to make the printing positions the same as an EPSON printer. However, if the target model has a 203 DPI print head, this correction is unnecessary, and will not have the print positions setting memory switch. 5-4-1) Thermal Printing Region HSP7000 Print region initial value (GS W nl nh) Printing Region Setting Printing Position Setting Initial Value (Memory Switch Setting) (Memory Switch Setting) nl nh Printing Region 72 mm ESC/POS Compatible Mode 0 2 64 mm Max. 64 2 72 mm 68 mm ESC/POS Compatible Mode 224 1 60 mm Max. 32 2 68 mm 51 mm ESC/POS Compatible Mode 104 1 45 mm Max. 152 1 51 mm Basic Calculated Pitch Initial Value: X = 1/180 (inch), Y = 1/360 (inch) Left margin initial value (GS L nl nh) Printing Region Setting Printing Position Setting Initial Value (Memory Switch Setting) (Memory Switch Setting) nl nh Left Margin 72mm ESC/POS Compatible Mode 32 0 4 mm Max. 0 0 0 mm 68 mm ESC/POS Compatible Mode 32 0 4 mm Max. 0 0 0 mm 51 mm ESC/POS Compatible Mode 24 0 3 mm Max. 0 0 0 mm Basic Calculated Pitch Initial Value: X = 1/180 (inch), Y = 1/360 (inch) 5-9

5-5) Appendix 5 Page Mode 5-5-1) General Description This printer has two printing modes: standard and page modes. In standard mode, the printer prints and feeds paper each time it receives the print and paper feed instructions, but the print and paper feed instructions received in page mode are executed on the print region on the specified memory and the printer does not operate. Then, when the ESC FF or FF commands are executed, the printer batch expands data to the printing region and prints. In other words, when printing and performing a line feed for data of ABCDEF <LF>, in standard mode, ABCDEF is printed and paper is fed one line. In page mode, however, ABCDEF is written to the print region specified on the memory, and one line is moved on the memory to write the next print data. This printer will enter page mode using ESC L. Commands received thereafter are all processed as page mode. By executing ESC FF, received data is batch printed. By executing FF, received data is batch printed, then the printer recovers to standard mode. Print data of the page mode is not printed, and the printer returns to standard mode using ESC S. However, print data is cleared. <Transition of Stand Mode Page Mode> ESC L Standard Mode Page Mode ESC S ESC FF Print Print FF 5-5-2) Setting Values of Commands in Standard Mode and Page Mode Values set by each command are shared by both standard and page modes. However, only the following commands are set independently. ESC SP, ESC 2, ESC 3, FS S The maximum number of dots is prescribed in standard mode, but the y directions (the x direction when there is no rotation) when printing is rotated 90 or 270º are larger than that. See Set Print Region in Page Mode (ESC W) for details. 5-10

5-5-3) Expanding Print Data to the Print Region <Thermal> Expanding print data to the print region is performed in the following way. (1) The print region is set by ESC W, but when all printing and paper feeds are ended before the printer receives ESC W the left edge when facing the printer becomes the origin of the print region (x0, y0). The print region is a square shape using dx pitch for the x direction (horizontal direction) and dy pitch for the y direction (perpendicular direction) as sides, including the origin point from the origin points (x0, y0). (When ESC W is not set, the initial value is the print region.) (2) When the print region is set by ESC W, and the printer receives print data after the print direction is set by ESC T, point A in Fig. 5.3.1 becomes the starting point initial value, and the print data is expanded in the print region. For characters, this starting point is the base line. Download bit images and bar codes are expanded by aligning the bottom left point of the image data over the base line. (See point B in Fig. 5.3.2) However, HRI characters with a bottom bar code are printed below the base line. When expanding characters (double-tall characters) higher than the standard character height, and download bit images and the like at the starting point, the portion higher than the standard characters is not printed. (3) If the print data is out of the print region (including character right spaces) before receiving commands that accompany line feeds (LF, ESC J and the like), the line feed is automatically performed in the print region, and the expansion position of the print data is moved one line so the next expansion position is at the top of the line. The line feed amount at that time uses the line feed amount set by ESC 2 and ESC 3. (4) The initial value of the line feed amount when the basic calculated pitch correction is 180DPI is 4.23 mm (1/6 inch). This is equivalent to 33 dots. Therefore, when expanded characters higher than double-tall in the vertical direction, more than 2 lines of download bit images, or bar codes higher than the character height are included in the print data for the next line, the line feed amount is insufficient and the upper dots of the characters will overlap previous print data so it is necessary to increase the line feed amount. The line feed amount for the first line in the following example requires more than 28 dots. (Fig. 5.3.3) [Ex.:] When printing 6-byte vertical direction download bit images (Vertical dot count (8 x 6) starting point line feed amount (20) x perpendicular direction basic calculated pitch conversion (360/180) = 56 Therefore, an extra line feed of 56 pitches (28 dots) is necessary. ESC W, xl, xh, yl, yh, dxl, dxh, dyl, dyh ESC T n ESC 3 54 Additional line feed amount LF GS / 1 ESC 2 Returns to line feed amount 4.23 mm (1/6 inch) Notes: Because the basic calculated pitch is 1/180 in the horizontal direction and 1/360 in the perpendicular direction in default, error such as position specifications is generated by the print direction. When the basic calculated pitch of the perpendicular direction is set to 1/180 by command (GS P), error will not occur by the print direction. STAR The page print region setting, expansion position of print data, line feed and movement amount of position movement when in page mode are affected by basic calculated pitch correction using the DIP switches. See Specify Basic Calculated Pitch (GS P) and Specify Print Region (ESC W) for details. 5-11

Fig. 5.3.1 Expansion Position of Character Data (x0, y 0) 20 dot A Expansion Base Line 4 dot Point A Printing (dx, dy) Fig. 5.3.2 Expansion Position of Print Data Bar Code Height h dot (y x8) dots 40dot 20 dot A Double high Expanded 24 dot Bit image Download Bit image (GS * x y) Bar code (GS k m) Base Line 4dot 8dot A B Point B Point B Point B Point HRI Characters 24 DOTS 5-12

Fig. 5.3.3 Expansion Position of Download Bit Images (x0, y0) A 20 dot 4 dot Base Line Expansion Direction Download Bit Image (GS * x y) A A 20 dot 4 dot (GS * x y) A Base Line Print Region (dx, dy) Point B Point B Point B Point B Raster bit images, raster graphics, NV bit images and NV graphics are expanded at the same position as download bit images. 5-13

5-5-4) Page Mode Printing Region <Thermal > EPSON has models equipped with 180 and 203 DPI print heads. STAR print heads are 203 DPI, so if a EPSON 180 DPI print head model is targeted, it is necessary to correct the printing positions that are different because of the difference in print density of such print heads. This correction is performed using the print positions: ESC/POS compatible mode/maximum memory switch. By setting this memory to ESC/POS compatible mode, it is possible to make the printing positions the same as an EPSON printer. When the printing positions of the memory switch in page mode are set to ESC/POS compatible mode, the setting of the basic calculated pitch correction changes the page mode print region initial value (= maximum value). However, if the target model has a 203 DPI print head, this correction is unnecessary, and will not have the print positions setting memory switch. The following is a conceptual view of the basic calculated pitch correction of the print region in page mode on HSP7000. <HSP7000 Basic Calculated Pitch Correction Drawing Printing Positions = ESC/POS Compatible Mode Selection, Print Region Setting 72 mm> ( 0, 0 ) 117.3mm 938 dot STAR Printer Print Head 203DPI ( 0, 0 ) 203 DPI Correction 117.3mm 831 dot EPSON Printer Print Head 180DPI ( 0, 0 ) 72mm 576 dot ( 576,1876 ) 180 DPI Correction 72mm 512 dot ( 511,1661 ) 103.9mm 831 dot STAR Printer Print Head 203DPI 64mm 512 dot ( 511,1661 ) 5-14

HSP7000 Page Mode Print Region Initial Value (dxl, dxh, dyl, dyh) <Printing Positions: ESC/POS Compatible Mode> Basic Calculated Pitch Initial Value (= Max. Value) Printing Region Setting Correction Printable Region Width (Memory Switch Setting) dxl dxh dyl dyh (Set by DIP switches) X Direction Y Direction 72 mm 203 DPI 64 2 84 7 72 mm 117.3mm 180 DPI 0 2 126 6 64 mm 103.9mm 68 mm 203 DPI 32 2 84 7 68 mm 117.3mm 180 DPI 224 1 126 6 60 mm 103.9mm 51 mm 203 DPI 152 1 84 7 51 mm 117.3mm 180 DPI 104 1 126 6 45 mm 103.9mm Basic Calculated Pitch Initial Value: X = 1/180 (inch), Y = 1/360 (inch) Page Mode Print Region Initial Value (dxl, dxh, dyl, dyh) <Printing Positions: Max.> Basic Calculated Pitch Initial Value (= Max. Value) Printing Region Setting Correction Printable Region Width (Memory Switch Setting) dxl dxh dyl dyh (Set by DIP switches) X Direction Y Direction 72 mm 203 DPI 64 2 84 7 72 mm 117.3mm 180 DPI 64 2 84 7 64 mm 103.9mm 68 mm 203 DPI 32 2 84 7 68 mm 117.3mm 180 DPI 32 2 84 7 60 mm 103.9mm 51 mm 203 DPI 152 1 84 7 51 mm 117.3mm 180 DPI 152 1 84 7 45 mm 103.9mm Basic Calculated Pitch Initial Value: X = 1/180 (inch), Y = 1/360 (inch) 5-15

5-5-5) Expansion of Print Data to Print Region <Slip>/<ation> Expanding print data to the print region is performed in the following way. (1) The print region is set by ESC W, but when all printing and paper feeds are ended before the printer receives ESC W the left edge when facing the printer becomes the origin of the print region (x0, y0). The print region is a square shape using dx pitch for the x direction (horizontal direction) and dy pitch for the y direction (perpendicular direction) as sides, including the origin point from the origin points (x0, y0). (When ESC W is not set, the initial value is the print region.) (2) When the print region is set by ESC W, and the printer receives print data after the print direction is set by ESC T, point A in Fig. 5.5.1 becomes the starting point initial value, and the print data is expanded in the print region. Double-tall characters and download bit images are expanded with Point B in Fig. 5.5.2 as the origin point. When expanding characters (double-tall characters) higher than the standard character height, and download bit images and the like at the starting point, the portion higher than the standard characters is not printed. (3) If the print data is out of the print region (including character right spaces) before receiving commands that accompany line feeds (LF, ESC J and the like), the line feed is automatically performed in the print region, and the expansion position of the print data is moved one line so the next expansion position is at the top of the line. The line feed amount at that time uses the line feed amount set by ESC 2 and ESC 3. (4) The initial value of the line feed amount is 4.23 mm (1/6 inch). This is equivalent to 24 half-dots. Therefore, when double-tall expanded characters, or more than 2 lines of download bit images are included in the print data for the next line, the line feed amount is insufficient and the upper dots of the characters will overlap previous print data so it is necessary to increase the line feed amount. The line feed amount for the first line in the following example requires more than 24 half-dots. [Ex.:] When printing 6-byte vertical direction download bit images (Vertical dot count (8 x 6) starting point line feed amount (20) x perpendicular direction basic calculated pitch conversion (288/144) = 56 Therefore, an extra line feed of 56 pitches (28 half-dots) is necessary. ESC W, xl, xh, yl, yh, dxl, dxh, dyl, dyh ESC T n ESC 3 54 Additional line feed amount LF GS / 1 ESC 2 Returns to line feed amount 4.23 mm (1/6 inch) Notes: Because the basic calculated pitch is 1/160 in the horizontal direction and 1/144 in the perpendicular direction in default, error such as position specifications is generated by the print direction. When the basic calculated pitch of the perpendicular direction is set to 1/144 by command (GS P), error will not occur by the print direction. STAR See Specify Basic Calculated Pitch (GS P) and Specify Print Region (ESC W) for details. 5-16

Fig. 5.5.3 Expansion Position of Character Data Expansion Direction Point A Print Region Fig. 5.5.2 Expansion Position of Print Data 36 Half dot Double high Expanded (yx8)half dot Download Bit image GS * x y 18 Half dot 18 Half dot Bit image Point B Point B Point B Point B Raster bit images, NV bit images and NV graphics are expanded at the same position as download bit images. 5-17

5-6) Appendix 6 Expansion Position for Slip/ation 5-6-1) 7 x 9 Fonts Head Pin No. Head Pin No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 Normal Dot Half Dot #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 Normal 7x9 Double tall 7x9 Bit image 5-6-2) 5 x 9 Fonts Head Pin No. #1 #2 #1 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 Normal Dot Head Pin No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 Normal 5x9 Double tall 5x9 Bit image 5-18

5-6-3) Kanji Fonts Normal Dots Half-dots Head Pin No. Head Pin No. #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 ANK 7x9 #1 #1 #2 #2 #3 #3 #4 #4 #5 #5 #6 #6 #7 #7 #8 #8 #9 #9 Kanji 1/144 inch 1/72 inch First Pass First Pass Second Pass 5-19

5-7) Appendix 7 Maximum Number of Characters for QR Codes in Each Version 1) Model 1 Versions and Maximum Number of Input Characters Version Number of Cells on One Side Error Correction Level Numbers Alphanumeric Binary Kanji Character 1 21 L 40 24 17 10 M 33 20 14 8 Q 25 15 11 6 H 16 10 7 4 2 25 L 81 49 34 20 M 66 40 28 17 Q 52 31 22 13 H 33 20 14 8 3 29 L 131 79 55 33 M 100 60 42 25 Q 81 49 34 20 H 52 31 22 13 4 33 L 186 113 78 48 M 138 84 58 35 Q 114 69 48 29 H 76 46 32 19 5 37 L 253 154 106 65 M 191 116 80 49 Q 157 95 66 40 H 105 63 44 27 6 41 L 321 194 134 82 M 249 151 104 64 Q 201 122 84 51 H 133 81 56 34 7 45 L 402 244 168 103 M 311 188 130 80 Q 253 154 106 65 H 167 101 70 43 8 49 L 493 299 206 126 M 378 229 158 97 Q 301 183 126 77 H 203 123 85 52 9 53 L 585 354 244 150 M 441 267 184 113 Q 369 223 154 94 H 239 145 100 61 10 57 L 690 418 287 177 M 526 319 219 135 Q 433 262 180 111 H 291 176 121 74 11 61 L 800 485 333 205 M 608 368 253 156 Q 493 299 205 126 H 342 207 142 87 12 65 L 915 555 381 234 M 694 421 289 178 Q 579 351 241 148 H 390 236 162 100 13 69 L 1030 624 429 264 M 790 479 329 202 Q 656 398 273 168 H 454 275 189 116 14 73 L 1167 707 486 299 M 877 531 365 225 Q 738 447 307 189 H 498 302 207 127 5-20

2) Model 1 Versions and Maximum Number of Input Characters Version Number of Cells on One Side Error Correction Level Numbers Alphanumeric Binary Kanji Character 1 21 L 41 25 17 10 M 34 20 14 8 Q 27 16 11 7 H 17 10 7 4 2 25 L 77 47 32 20 M 63 38 26 16 Q 48 29 20 12 H 34 20 14 8 3 29 L 127 77 53 32 M 101 61 42 26 Q 77 47 32 20 H 58 35 24 15 4 33 L 187 114 78 48 M 149 90 62 38 Q 111 67 46 28 H 82 50 34 21 5 37 L 255 154 106 65 M 202 122 84 52 Q 144 87 60 37 H 106 64 44 27 6 41 L 322 195 134 82 M 255 154 106 65 Q 178 108 74 45 H 139 84 58 36 7 45 L 370 224 154 95 M 293 178 122 75 Q 207 125 86 53 H 154 93 64 39 8 49 L 461 279 192 118 M 365 221 152 93 Q 259 157 108 66 H 202 122 84 52 9 53 L 552 335 230 141 M 432 262 180 111 Q 312 189 130 80 H 235 143 98 60 10 57 L 652 395 271 167 M 513 311 213 131 Q 364 221 151 93 H 288 174 119 74 11 61 L 772 468 321 198 M 604 366 251 155 Q 427 259 177 109 H 331 200 137 85 12 65 L 883 535 367 226 M 691 419 287 177 Q 489 296 203 125 H 374 227 155 96 13 69 L 1022 619 425 262 M 796 483 331 204 Q 580 352 241 149 H 427 259 177 109 14 73 L 1101 667 458 282 M 871 528 362 223 Q 621 376 258 159 H 468 283 194 120 15 77 L 1250 758 520 320 M 991 600 412 254 Q 703 426 292 180 H 530 321 220 136 5-21

Version Number of Cells on One Side Error Correction Level Numbers Alphanumeric Binary Kanji Character 16 81 L 1408 854 586 361 M 1082 656 450 277 Q 775 470 322 198 H 602 365 250 154 17 85 L 1548 938 644 397 M 1212 734 504 310 Q 876 531 364 224 H 674 408 280 173 18 89 L 1725 1046 718 442 M 1346 816 560 345 Q 948 574 394 243 H 746 452 310 191 19 93 L 1903 1153 792 488 M 1500 909 624 384 Q 1063 644 442 272 H 813 493 338 208 20 97 L 2061 1249 858 528 M 1600 970 666 410 Q 1159 702 482 297 H 919 557 382 235 21 101 L 2232 1352 929 572 M 1708 1035 711 438 Q 1224 742 509 314 H 969 587 403 248 22 105 L 2409 1460 1003 618 M 1872 1134 779 480 Q 1358 823 565 348 H 1056 640 439 270 23 109 L 2620 1588 1091 672 M 2059 1248 857 528 Q 1468 890 611 376 H 1108 672 461 284 24 113 L 2812 1704 1171 721 M 2188 1326 911 561 Q 1588 963 661 407 H 1228 744 511 315 25 117 L 3057 1853 1273 784 M 2395 1451 997 614 Q 1718 1041 715 440 H 1286 779 535 330 26 121 L 3283 1990 1367 842 M 2544 1542 1059 652 Q 1804 1094 751 462 H 1425 864 593 365 27 125 L 3514 2132 1465 902 M 2701 1637 1125 692 Q 1933 1172 805 496 H 1501 910 625 385 28 129 L 3669 2223 1528 940 M 2857 1732 1190 732 Q 2085 1263 868 534 H 1581 958 658 405 29 133 L 3909 2369 1628 1002 M 3035 1839 1264 778 Q 2181 1322 908 559 H 1677 1016 698 430 30 137 L 4158 2520 1732 1066 M 3289 1994 1370 843 Q 2358 1429 982 604 H 1782 1080 742 457 5-22

Version Number of Cells on One Side Error Correction Level Numbers Alphanumeric Binary Kanji Character 31 141 L 4417 2677 1840 1132 M 3486 2113 1452 894 Q 2473 1499 1030 634 H 1897 1150 790 486 32 145 L 4686 2840 1952 1201 M 3693 2238 1538 947 Q 2670 1618 1112 684 H 2022 1226 842 518 33 149 L 4965 3009 2068 1273 M 3909 2369 1628 1002 Q 2805 1700 1168 719 H 2157 1307 898 553 34 153 L 5253 3183 2188 1347 M 4134 2506 1722 1060 Q 2949 1787 1228 756 H 2301 1394 958 590 35 157 L 5529 3351 2303 1417 M 4343 2632 1809 1113 Q 3081 1867 1283 790 H 2361 1431 983 605 36 161 L 5836 3537 2431 1496 M 4588 2780 1911 1176 Q 3244 1966 1351 832 H 2524 1530 1051 647 37 165 L 6153 3729 2563 1577 M 4775 2894 1989 1224 Q 3417 2071 1423 876 H 2625 1591 1093 673 38 169 L 6479 3927 2699 1661 M 5039 3054 2099 1292 Q 3599 2181 1499 923 H 2735 1658 1139 701 39 173 L 6743 4087 2809 1729 M 5313 3220 2213 1362 Q 3791 2298 1579 972 H 2927 1774 1219 750 40 177 L 7089 4296 2953 1817 M 5596 3391 2331 1435 Q 3993 2420 1663 1024 H 3057 1852 1273 784 5-23

6) SPECIAL APPENDIX COMMAND FUNCTION LIST 6-1) HSP7000 6-1-1) Setting Command List Execution Thermal Slip ation Station Type Command Thermal, Slip, Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions ation Amount of Line ESC 2 Set Independently Set Sheet For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page Feed Selection dependent ESC 3 Set Independently Set Sheet For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page Selection dependent Character ESC t Setting ESC R Setting ESC M Setting Print Paper Panel Switches Paper Out Sensor Printing Position ESC SP Setting For each Line/Page ESC! Setting ESC - Setting ESC E Setting ESC G Setting ESC V Setting only Line ESC { Setting only Line GS! Setting For each Line/Page GS B GS b GS ( N function 48 Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Font-A: 12x24 Font-B: 9x17 If parameter is outside the range, 3 bytes are ignored. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. For each Line/Page only Line only Line Invalid Font-A: 5x9 Font-B: 7x9 In page mode, fixed at 5 x 9 When 7x9 is specified in page mode, it is valid after switching to line mode/double-density mode. When double-density mode is selected, only setting is valid When double-density mode is selected, only setting is valid When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. 3x settings valid after switching to thermal. after switch to thermal For each Line/Page only Line only Line Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid ESC % Setting ESC & Set Independently Set Sheet Selection dependent ESC? ESC f Set Independently Set Sheet Selection dependent Set Independently Set Sheet Selection dependent ESC c 5 Setting ESC c 3 Setting ESC c 4 Setting ESC D Setting ESC a Setting only Line Invalid Invalid 4 bytes ignored When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. only Line after switch to thermal ation and shared registration data Deleted data is the same when validation is selected. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. Invalid only Line Font-A: 5x9 Font-B: 7x9 In page mode, fixed at 5 x 9 When 7x9 is specified in page mode, it is valid after switching to line mode/double-density mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. 3x settings valid after switching to thermal. after switch to thermal after switch to thermal Slip and shared registration data Slip and deleted data are the same. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. 6-1

Execution Station Type Command Thermal, Slip, ation Printing GS L Set Independently Position Set Sheet Selection dependent GS W Set Independently Set Sheet Selection dependent Bit Image Thermal Slip ation Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions only Line only Line ESC T Setting Page only ESC W Setting Page only FS q (Not recommended) GS * (Not recommended) GS ( L / GS 8 L function 67 Setting Set Independently Set Sheet Selection dependent Setting only Line only Line Status GS a Setting GS ( B Setting FS ( e Setting Bar GS H Setting Codes GS f Setting GS h Setting GS w Setting Macro GS : Setting Mechanism ESC U Setting Invalid Slip, ation Control Only setting is valid When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When line mode is specified, it is valid after switching to page mode. When line mode is specified, it is valid after switching to page mode. When trying to define in page mode, 2 bytes ignored, then, subsequent data is handled as normal data. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. when set while in page mode, and printing in line mode after switching to slip/validation, and when set while in page mode and printing in page mode after switching to slip or validation. only Line only Line Page only Page only only Line only Line Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid For each Line/Page When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When line mode is specified, it is valid after switching to page mode. When line mode is specified, it is valid after switching to page mode. When trying to define in page mode, 2 bytes ignored, then, subsequent data is handled as normal data. ation and shared registration data When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting shared when in line mode, line mode for validation, in page mode, page mode for validation. only Line only Line Page only Page only only Line only Line Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid For each Line/Page ESC F Setting Invalid Invalid Invalid When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When line mode is specified, it is valid after switching to page mode. When line mode is specified, it is valid after switching to page mode. When trying to define in page mode, 2 bytes ignored, then, subsequent data is handled as normal data. Slip and shared registration data When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting shared when in line mode, line mode for slip, in page mode, page mode for slip. MICR FS ( f Setting Others ESC = Setting GS P Set Independently Set Sheet Selection dependent GS ( D Setting Invalid Counter data is received and discarded. GS ( H Setting Invalid Setting is valid after Slip only swiching to slip. GS ( K Setting Kanji FS & Setting Character FS. Setting Invalid Invalid Setting shared with validation Counter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Invalid Invalid Invalid Setting shared with slip Counter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after swiching to slip. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. 6-2

Execution Station Type Command Thermal, Slip, ation Kanji FS C Setting Character PDF417 User NV Memory Edit Printer Customized STAR Original FS S Setting For each Line/Page FS! Setting FS - Setting FS W Setting FS 2 GS ( k function 65 GS ( k function 66 GS ( k function 67 GS ( k function 68 GS ( k function 69 GS ( k function 70 GS ( k function 80 GS ( C function 1 GS ( M function 3 Set Independently Set Sheet Selection dependent Thermal Slip ation Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Invalid Ccounter data is received and discarded. Setting Invalid Ccounter data is received and discarded. ESC GS t Setting ESC RS F Setting Only valid for thermal ESC RS C Setting Only valid for thermal only Line When page mode is selected,4 bytes ignored. For each Line/Page Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or double-density page mode. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Ccounter data is received and discarded. Ccounter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. For each Line/Page Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or doubledensity page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or doubledensity page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or doubledensity page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or doubledensity page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or doubledensity page mode. Kanji printing possible only when in doubledensity page mode When set in page mode, valid after switching to line mode or doubledensity page mode. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Counter data is received and discarded. Ccounter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Presenter ESC SYN 1 Setting Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored ESC SYN 2 Setting Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Mark Commands ESC GS * 1 Setting Only valid for thermal Invalid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Invalid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Auto Logo ESC GS * 2 ESC GS / 1 ESC GS / 2 Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal only Line only Line Possible only when set while in page mode. Auto Logo function invalid. Possible only when set while in page mode. Auto Logo function invalid. Invalid Invalid Invalid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Invalid Invalid Invalid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 6-3

Execution Station Type Command Thermal, Slip, ation Auto ESC GS / 3 Setting Logo Only valid for thermal ESC GS / 4 ESC GS / 5 ESC GS / 6 Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Setting Only valid for thermal Thermal Slip ation Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions only Line only Line only Line only Line User ID ESC GS % 0 Setting Buzzer ESC GS EM Setting DC1 Printer ESC RS A Set Independently Driver only Line Set Sheet Selection dependent Print Start Trigger QR Code Page Function Possible only when set while in page mode. Auto Logo function invalid. Possible only when set while in page mode. Auto Logo function invalid. Possible only when set while in page mode. Auto Logo function invalid. Possible only when set while in page mode. Auto Logo function invalid. When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid only Line Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid only Line Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored ESC RS m Setting Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored ESC GS g 1 When page mode Invalid Setting is valid after Invalid Setting is valid after Only valid for only Line is selected, 6 bytes switching to thermal. switching to thermal. thermal ignored ESC GS y S 0 ESC GS y S 1 ESC GS y S 2 ESC GS y D 1 ESC GS y D 2 ESC GS h 0 ESC GS h 1 Only valid for thermal Only valid for thermal Only valid for thermal Only valid for thermal Only valid for thermal Only valid for thermal Only valid for thermal only Line only Line When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. When page mode is specified, it is valid after switching to line mode. Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. 6-4

6-1-2) Execution Command List Execution Station Thermal Slip ation Type Command Thermal, Slip, Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions ation Print Execution LF CR FF (Standard Mode) FF (Page mode) ESC FF ESC J ESC K ESC d ESC e Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Character CAN Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent For each Line/Page For each Line/Page Function switched by memory setting For each Line/Page For each Line/Page Function switched by memory setting For each Line/Page For each Line/Page Invalid 1 byte ignored Discharge Discharge Page only For each Line/Page In line mode, 2 bytes ignored Page only For each Line/Page Invalid 3 bytes ignored For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page Invalid 3 bytes ignored For each Line/Page Page only In line mode, 1 byte ignored Page only In line mode, 2 bytes ignored In line mode, 1 byte ignored Page only For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page Page only Print Paper ESC c 0 Execution When page mode is selected, When page mode is selected, only Line 4 bytes ignored only Line 4 bytes ignored only Line ESC c 1 Execution Function switched by memory setting In line mode, 2 bytes ignored In line mode, 1 byte ignored When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored Printing Position Bit Image GS ( G GS ( G HT ESC $ ESC \ GS T GS $ GS \ ESC * function 48 function 84 FS p (Not recommended) GS / (Not recommended) Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent only Line Invalid For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page only Line Page only Page only For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, 3 bytes ignored In line mode, 4 byte ignored In line mode, 4 byte ignored only Line For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page only Line Page only Page only For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, 3 bytes ignored In line mode, 4 byte ignored In line mode, 4 byte ignored only Line Invalid For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page only Line Page only Page only For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, 3 bytes ignored In line mode, 4 byte ignored In line mode, 4 byte ignored 6-5

Type Command Thermal, Slip, ation Bit image GS v 0 (Not recommended) GS ( L / GS 8 L function 48 GS ( L / GS 8 L function 51 GS ( L / GS 8 L function 64 GS ( L / GS 8 L function 65 GS ( L / GS 8 L function 66 GS ( L / GS 8 L function 69 GS ( L / GS 8 L function 50 GS ( L / GS 8 L function 112 Execution Station Thermal Slip ation Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page only Line only Line For each Line/Page When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Execution Invalid Counter data is received and discarded. Execution For each Line/Page Status DLE EOT Execution GS a Execution GS r Execution Bar Codes GS k Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Macro GS ^ Execution Mechanism Control For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page only Line only Line For each Line/Page Invalid Invalid When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Counter data is received and discarded. Counter data is received and discarded. Invalid Specified byte count is ignored. For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page For each Line/Page only Line only Line For each Line/Page Invalid Invalid Invalid When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Counter data is received and discarded. Counter data is received and discarded. Specified byte count is ignored. ESC < Execution Invalid 2 bytes ignored Invalid 2 bytes ignored Invalid 2 bytes ignored GS V Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Only Thermal ESC q Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent MICR DLE EOT 8 1 Only in MICR Mode FS a 0 (Not recommended) FS a 1 (Not recommended) FS a 2 (Not recommended) FS b (Not recommended) Execution Only in MICR Mode Only in MICR Mode Only in MICR Mode Invalid 2 bytes ignored only Line Invalid 4 bytes ignored MICR Mode Only setting is valid only Line FS c Execution only Line Others DLE ENQ Execution DLE DC4 1 Execution When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored Invalid 3 or 4 bytes ignored Invalid 3 or 4 bytes ignored only Line Invalid 3 bytes ignored MICR Mode Only setting is valid Invalid 3 bytes ignored MICR Mode Only setting is valid Invalid 2 bytes ignored MICR Mode Only setting is valid When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored only Line When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored When slip is selected, 4 bytes ignored When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored only Line Invalid only Line When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored 4 bytes ignored When page mode is selected, 4 bytes ignored 3 bytes ignored Invalid 3 bytes ignored 3 bytes ignored Invalid 3 bytes ignored 2 bytes ignored Invalid 2 bytes ignored When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored only Line When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored DLE DC4 2 Execution Invalid 5 bytes ignored Invalid 5 bytes ignored Invalid 5 bytes ignored DLE DC4 8 Execution ESC @ Execution ESC L FS L ESC S Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent only Line When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored only Line Invalid 2 bytes ignored only Line Page only ESC p Execution In line mode, 2 bytes ignored Page only When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored When double-density page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored In line mode, 2 bytes ignored only Line only Line Page only When page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored When double-density page mode is selected, 2 bytes ignored In line mode, 2 bytes ignored 6-6

Execution Station Type Command Thermal, Slip, ation Others GS ( A Execution PDF417 User NV Memory Edit User Setting Mode Printer Customized STAR Original GS E Execution Thermal Slip ation Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions only Line only Line When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. only Line Invalid When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. only Line Invalid When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. Setting is valid after switching to thermal. GS I Execution GS g 0 Execution Invalid 6 byte ignored Invalid 6 bytes ignored Invalid 6 bytes ignored GS g 2 Execution Invalid 6 bytes ignored Invalid 6 bytes ignored Invalid 6 bytes ignored ESC i Execution Invalid 2 bytes ignored Invalid 2 bytes ignored Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Only Thermal ESC m Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Only Thermal Invalid 2 bytes ignored Invalid 2 bytes ignored GS ( k Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- function 81 Independent and discarded. ceived and discarded. Print Sheet Selection dependent GS ( k Execution Send printing not Send printing not function 82 Independent possible possible Print Sheet Selection dependent GS ( C Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 0 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( C Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 2 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( C Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 3 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( C Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 4 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( C Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 5 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( C Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 6 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( E Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 1 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( M Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 1 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. GS ( M Execution Invalid Counter data is received Invalid Counter data is re- Invalid Counter data is re- function 2 and discarded. ceived and discarded. ceived and discarded. ESC GS = Setting Invalid Setting is valid after Invalid Setting is valid after Only valid for switching to thermal. switching to thermal. thermal ESC RS L Execution When page mode When page mode When page mode Independent only Line is selected, 4 bytes only Line is selected, 4 bytes only Line is selected, 4 bytes Print Sheet ignored ignored ignored Selection dependent ESC GS + Setting ESC # # W Setting ESC ETB Execution Invalid 3 bytes ignored When page mode Invalid 3 bytes ignored Independent only Line is selected, 3 bytes Print Sheet ignored Selection dependent ESC GS r Execution STAR Original ESC GS # Execution Others ESC # N Execution ESC # @ Execution ESC # N? Execution ESC # * Execution ESC CAN Execution Macro Initialization Execution Macro MAINTE- ESC RS M Execution NANCE Counter ESC GS M Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Invalid When page mode is selected, printer specification ignores 6 bytes Received and discarded up to <NUL>. Invalid When page mode is selected, printer specification ignores 6 bytes Received and discarded up to <NUL>. Invalid Printing specification only when getting status ignores 6 bytes Received and discarded up to <NUL>. Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored When page mode is selected, printer specification ignores 6 bytes When page mode is selected, printer specification ignores 6 bytes Printing specification only when getting status ignores 6 bytes 6-7

Execution Station Type Command Thermal, Slip, ation Presenter Mark Commands Auto Logo ESC SYN 0 ESC SYN 3 ESC SYN 4 ESC GS * 0 ESC GS * W ESC GS * C ESC GS / W ESC GS / C Execution Execution Execution Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Execution Execution Execution Execution User ID ESC GS % W Execution ESC GS % 1 Execution ESC GS % P Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent Buzzer ESC GS BEL Execution Rewrite Program Printer Driver Print Start Trigger ESC GS EM DC2 ESC GS? ESC GS CAN ESC GS g 0 Execution Execution Execution Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent QR Code ESC GS y P Execution Independent Print Sheet Selection dependent ESC GS y I Execution Thermal Slip ation Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Line/Page Other Precautions Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored only Line only Line only Line When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, 5 bytes ignored When page mode is selected, 6 bytes ignored Invalid only Line Counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, 5 bytes ignored Invalid only Line Counter data is received and discarded. When page mode is selected, 5 bytes ignored Invalid 6 bytes ignored Invalid 6 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Invalid 4 bytes ignored Sends Error Sends Error 6-8

ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS DIVISION STAR MICRONICS CO., LTD. 536 Nanatsushinya, Shimizu-ku, Shizuoka, 424-0066 Japan Tel: (int+81)-54-347-0112 Fax: (int+81)-54-347-0709 Please access the following URL http://www.star-m.jp/eng/dl/dl02.htm for the latest revision of the manual. OVERSEAS SUBSIDIARY COMPANIES STAR MICRONICS AMERICA, INC. 1150 King Georges Post Road, Edison, NJ 08837-3729 U.S.A. Tel: (int+1)-732-623-5555, Fax: (int+1)-732-623-5590 STAR MICRONICS EUROPE LTD. Star House, Peregrine Business Park, Gomm Road, High Wycombe, Bucks, HP13 7DL, U.K. Tel: (int+44)-1494-471111, Fax: (int+44)-1494-473333 STAR MICRONICS ASIA LTD. Rm. 1901-5, 19/F., Enterprise Square Two, 3 Sheung Yuet Road, Kowloon Bay, Hong Kong Tel : (int+852)-2796-2727, Fax : (int+852)-2799-9344 Rev. 0.00 2008.09.19 Printed in Japan, 80877175